2007 Pontiac Solstice Owner Manual M - General MotorsHow to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they ﬁrst receive their new vehicle. If this

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Safety Belts ............................................ 12Child Restraints ...................................... 27Airbag System ........................................ 42Restraint System Check ......................... 56

Features and Controls ................................ 59Keys ....................................................... 60Doors and Locks .................................... 65Windows ................................................ 70Theft-Deterrent Systems ......................... 72Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 76Mirrors .................................................... 93OnStar® System ..................................... 94

Storage Areas ........................................ 98Convertible Top ...................................... 99

Instrument Panel ....................................... 105Instrument Panel Overview ................... 108Climate Controls ................................... 122Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 127Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 145Audio System(s) ................................... 157

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 189Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 190Towing ................................................. 231

2007 Pontiac Solstice Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 233Service ................................................. 235Fuel ...................................................... 237Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 242Rear Axle ............................................. 279Bulb Replacement ................................ 280Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 283Tires ..................................................... 284Appearance Care .................................. 314Vehicle Identification ............................. 325

Electrical System .................................. 326Capacities and Specifications ................ 332

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 333Maintenance Schedule .......................... 334

Customer Assistance Information ............. 361Customer Assistance and

Information ........................................ 362Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 379

Index .......................................................... 383

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and thename SOLSTICE are registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Pontiac Division whenever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15859544 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazardis. Then we tell you what to do to help avoidor reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 9Seatback Latches ........................................ 11Power Lift Seat ........................................... 12

Safety Belts .................................................. 12Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 12Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 17How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 18Driver Position ............................................. 18Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 25Passenger Position ...................................... 26Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 26Safety Belt Extender ................................... 26

Child Restraints ............................................ 27Older Children ............................................. 27Infants and Young Children ......................... 30Child Restraint Systems .............................. 33

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) .................................................. 37

Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat Position .......................... 38

Airbag System .............................................. 42Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 45When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 47What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 48How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 48What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 48Passenger Sensing System ......................... 50Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 54Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 55Restraint System Check ............................... 56

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 56Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................... 57

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the lever locatedunder the front of theseat to unlock it.

Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe lever. Try to move the seat with your body tobe sure the seat is locked in place.

Make sure nothing is in front of or under the seatto prevent it from releasing or re-locking afteradjustment.

8

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seatback, turn the knob on theoutboard side of the seatback until the seatbackis in the desired position.

9

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

10

Seatback Latches

The seats have a latchlocated on the outboardside near the top ofthe seatback thatenables the frontseatback(s) to foldforward.

This allows access to the map pocket on the rearof the seatback.

To fold the seatback forward, lift the latch andpush the seatback forward.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

11

Power Lift SeatYour vehicle may have this feature.

The switch is located on the outboard side of thedriver’s seat. To use the adjuster, first move theseat forward or rearward to where you want it. SeeManual Seats on page 8. To raise the seat hold theswitch up. To lower the seat hold the switch down.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecan not wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be if you are buckledup. Always fasten your safety belt, andcheck that your passenger’s belt isfastened properly too.

12

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassenger to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 130 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 130.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a person wouldnot survive. But most crashes are in between. Inmany of them, people who buckle up can surviveand sometimes walk away. Without belts they couldhave been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

13

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

14

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

15

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

16

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passenger can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

17

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 27 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 30. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure.

18

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 26.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

19

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

20


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

21


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

22


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

23


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

24

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective is wearing themproperly.

25

Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the passenger’s safety beltproperly, see Driver Position on page 18.

The passenger’s safety belt works the same wayas the driver’s safety belt — except for onething. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of thebelt out all the way, you will engage the childrestraint locking feature. If this happens, just letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 57.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has been designedfor adults. Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.For more information see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

26

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs.It should never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

27

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of thevehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crashthe child’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide.

28

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bonesin a crash.

29

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

30

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

31

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant’s body,the back and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

32

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area thatis unprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious or fatalinjuries. Young children always should besecured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

33

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

34

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

35

Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installedin the vehicle using the vehicle’s safetybelt, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt. A child can be endangered in a crash if thechild restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,and a crotch strap. A shield may take the placeof hip straps.

36

A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that areattached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. Aspart of the LATCH system, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a top tether. TheLATCH system can help hold the child restraint inplace during driving or in a crash. Some vehicleshave lower and/or top tether anchors designedto secure a child restraint with lower attachmentsand/or a top tether.

Some child restraints with a top tether aredesigned to be used whether the top tether isanchored or not. Other child restraints require thatthe top tether be anchored. A national or locallaw may require that the top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facingchild restraints have a top tether, and thatthe tether be attached.

37

Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or toptether anchors to secure a child restraint withthe LATCH system. If a national or local lawrequires that your top tether be anchored, do notuse a child restraint in this vehicle because atop tether cannot be properly anchored. You mustuse the safety belts to secure your child restraintin this vehicle, unless a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be anchored. Refer toyour child restraint instructions and instructionsin this manual for securing a child restraintusing the vehicle’s safety belts.

Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat PositionYour vehicle has a passenger’s airbag. A rearseat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint.

In addition, your vehicle has the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn off the passenger’s frontalairbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 50 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 132for more information on this including importantsafety information.

38

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the passenger’s position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off.

CAUTION: (Continued)


We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles witha rear seat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, wheneverpossible.

There is no top strap anchor in your vehicle.Do not secure a child seat in your vehicleif a national or local law requires that the top strapbe anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 37 for moreinformation.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the passenger’s position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint. See Manual Seatson page 8.

39

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s frontal airbag.See Passenger Sensing System on page 50.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints not be transported in your vehicle,even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint isforward-facing, move the seat as far backas it will go before securing the child restraintin this seat. See Manual Seats on page 8.When the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag,the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay lit whenthe vehicle is started. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 132.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

40

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not beable to pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

41

7. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters and seat massagers,located between the seat cushion and thechild restraint or small occupant, can affecthow the passenger sensing system operates.

Remove any additional material from the seatcushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the passengerposition.

If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a childrestraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has an airbag for the driver and anairbag for the right front passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

42

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Airbags are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, airbags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than moreforceful airbags have provided in the past.Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

43

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, fasterthan the blink of an eye. If you are tooclose to an inflating airbag, as you wouldbe if you were leaning forward, it couldseriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position before and during acrash. Always wear your safety belt, evenwith airbags. The driver should sit as farback as possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 27 and Infants and Young Childrenon page 30.

44

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 131 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

45

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering.

46

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events andare used to predict how severe a crash is likely tobe in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontalairbags will or should deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largelyon what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors, which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the threshold levelfor the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for afull deployment is about 18 to 22 mph (28.9 to35.4 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,with specific vehicle design, so that it can besomewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

47

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repaircosts were. Inflation is determined by what thevehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle is in acrash. The sensing system triggers a release ofgas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.The inflator, airbag, and related hardware are allpart of the airbag modules inside the steering wheeland in the instrument panel in front of the right frontpassenger.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Theairbag supplements the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But airbags would not help you in many types ofcollisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,and many side impacts, primarily because anoccupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts, and then only inmoderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag or the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s bag — may be hot for a short time.

48

The parts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nordoes it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turnthe interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afterthey inflate, you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there to help protectyou in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts. Theservice manual for your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 373.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

49

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator willbe visible when you turn your ignition key toRUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for onand off, will be visible on the instrument panelduring the system check. When the system checkis complete, either the word ON or the wordOFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for offwill be visible. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 132.

The passenger sensing system will turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.The driver’s airbag is not part of the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the passenger’s seat.The sensors are designed to detect the presenceof a properly-seated occupant and determine ifthe passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints not be transported in your vehicle,even if the airbag is off.

Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows offand the airbag is off. Here is why:

United States Canada

50

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.



If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed toturn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if:• The passenger seat is unoccupied.• The system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a forward-facing child restraint.• The system determines that a small child is

present in a booster seat.• A passenger takes his/her weight off of the

seat for a period of time.• The passenger seat is occupied by a smaller

person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

51

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatorin the instrument panel will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 132.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Passenger Seat Positionon page 38.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.

If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a childrestraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the passenger’s frontal airbaganytime the system senses that a person of adultsize is sitting properly in the passenger’s seat.

When the passenger sensing system has allowedthe airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and body build. Everyonein your vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whetheror not there is an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in thepassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

52

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.



If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of thefrontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 131 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material from theseat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the passengerposition. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 55 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

53

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You do notwant the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 380.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

54

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontof the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 362.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,the instrument panel, or airbag wiring canaffect the operation of the airbag system.If you have questions, call CustomerAssistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 362.

55

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 317for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,the airbag may not work properly. You mayhave to replace the airbag module in thesteering wheel or both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag. Do not open or break theairbag coverings.

56

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to havesafety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. Newparts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also needto replace the driver’s and passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 131.

57

✍ NOTES

58

Keys .............................................................. 60Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 61Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 62Doors and Locks .......................................... 65

Manual Door Locks ..................................... 65Power Door Locks ....................................... 66Delayed Locking .......................................... 66Automatic Door Lock ................................... 67Automatic Door Unlock ................................ 67Trunk .......................................................... 68

Windows ....................................................... 70Manual Windows ......................................... 71Power Windows .......................................... 71Sun Visors .................................................. 71

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................... 72Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 72PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 74PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 74

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 76New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 76Ignition Positions ......................................... 77Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............... 80

Starting the Engine ..................................... 80Automatic Transmission Operation ............... 82Manual Transmission Operation ................... 85Parking Brake ............................................. 86Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic

Transmission) .......................................... 87Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 89Parking Your Vehicle (Manual

Transmission) .......................................... 89Parking Over Things That Burn ................... 90Engine Exhaust ........................................... 91Running the Engine While Parked ............... 92

Mirrors ........................................................... 93Manual Rearview Mirror .............................. 93Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ......... 93Outside Manual Mirror ................................. 93Outside Power Mirrors ................................. 94

OnStar® System ............................................ 94Storage Areas ............................................... 98

Glove Box ................................................... 98Cupholder(s) ............................................... 98Center Console Storage Area ...................... 99

Convertible Top ............................................ 99

Section 2 Features and Controls

59

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

60

One key works all ofthe lock cylinders onthe vehicle.

Your vehicle has an Immobilizer VehicleTheft-Deterrent System. The key has atransponder in the key head that matches adecoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If areplacement key or any additional key is needed,you must purchase it from your dealer. Thekey will have a 1 stamped on it. Keep the barcode tag that came with the original keys. Give thistag to your dealer if you need a new key made.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 368.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

61

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system. Ifthe transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter towork, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 62.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation

The vehicle’s doors canbe locked and unlocked,and the trunk can beunlatched fromabout 3 feet (1 m) up to60 feet (18 m) awaywith the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps may flashonce and the horn may chirp to indicate lockinghas occurred. See “LOCK HORN” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 152.

62

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one time tounlock the driver’s door. Press the unlockbutton again within five seconds to unlock theother doors. The interior lamps will come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turnedon. If enabled through the DIC, the parkinglamps will flash once to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. See “UNLOCK HORN” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 152.

V (Trunk Release): Press and hold this buttonfor approximately one second to release thetrunk lid. The trunk release will only work if theignition is off or the vehicle speed is less than2 mph (3 km/h).

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to help locate your vehicle.The horn will sound three times and the hazardlamps will flash three times. Press and holdthe button for three seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn will sound and the hazardlamps will flash for 30 seconds. The ignition mustbe off for the vehicle locator/remote alarm towork. Press the vehicle locator/panic alarm buttonagain or turn the ignition to ACC or RUN toturn off the alarm.

The vehicle may have Remote Lock/UnlockConfirmation. This feature provides feedback thata command has been received by the vehicle.The parking lamps will flash and the hornmay sound briefly. See “LOCK HORN” and“UNLOCK HORN” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152 for programminginformation.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is uniquelycoded to prevent another transmitter fromunlocking the vehicle. If a transmitter is lost orstolen, a replacement can be purchased throughyour dealer. Remember to bring any additionaltransmitters so they can also be re-coded to matchthe new transmitter. Once your dealer hascoded the new transmitter, the lost transmittercannot unlock the vehicle. The vehicle can have amaximum of four transmitters coded to it.

63

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the remote keylessentry transmitter should last about four years.

If the battery is weak the transmitter will not workwithin its normal range. It is probably time tochange the battery if you have to be very close tothe vehicle before the transmitter works.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery do the following:1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the

notch, located below the trunk releasebutton, and pry the front and back apart.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing up. Usea type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

64

Doors and Locks

Manual Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are a couple of ways to lock and unlockyour vehicle manually.

65

From inside the vehicle,use the manual doorlock knob. Pull up ordown on the knob tounlock or lock the door.

To lock either door from the outside, turn the keytoward the rear of the vehicle. To unlock thedoor, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle.

Power Door LocksYou can use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to lock and unlock the doors from insideor outside the vehicle. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 62 formore information.

The power door lock switches are located on thedriver’s and passenger’s door.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.

Delayed LockingIf your vehicle has power door locks, it will havethe delayed locking feature. This feature delays theactual locking of the doors when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to lockthe vehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle usingthe RKE transmitter, three chimes will soundsignaling that the delayed locking feature is active.Five seconds after the last door is closed, bothdoors will lock and the parking lamps will flash.To cancel the delay and lock the doors immediately,press the lock button on the RKE a second time.

If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lockthe doors.

Your vehicle is programmed from the factory withthis feature turned off. To turn the feature on,you must go through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), if the vehicle has one. See DICVehicle Personalization on page 152.

66

Automatic Door LockIf your vehicle has power door locks, the doors willautomatically lock when the shift lever is movedout of PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatictransmission. For a vehicle with a manualtransmission, the speed must be greater than5 mph (8 km/h).

The automatic door locking feature cannot bedisabled.

Automatic Door UnlockIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission andpower door locks, the doors with automaticallyunlock when the shift lever is moved intoPARK (P).

If your vehicle has a manual transmission andpower door locks, the doors will automaticallyunlock when the key is removed from the ignition.

The automatic unlock feature can be disabledor programmed in different ways if the vehicle hasan automatic transmission and a DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152 for more information.

67

TrunkTo release the trunk lid from the outside, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if thevehicle has one. If your vehicle does not have anRKE transmitter, see “Remote Trunk Release”following.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunklid open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.



If you must drive with the trunk lid openor if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 91.

68

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk from inside the vehicle, pressthe remote trunk release button located in theglovebox.

The remote trunk release will only work wheneither the ignition is off or in ACC, the parkingbrake is engaged, or the vehicle speed is less than2 mph (3 km/h).

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk onthe driver’s side. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. If someone is locked in the trunk,they can pull the release handle and push thetrunk lid open from the inside to open the trunk.

69

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

70

Manual Windows

If your vehicle hasmanual windows, usethe window crankto open and close eachwindow.

Power Windows

If your vehicle haspower windows, theswitches on the driver’sdoor armrest controlboth windows.

In addition, the passenger’s door has a windowswitch that controls that window. Press the front ofthe switch to open the window. Pull the switchup to close it.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window has an express-down featurewhich allows the window to be lowered fully withoutpressing and holding the switch. Press the front ofthe switch to the first position, and the window willopen a small amount. Press the switch down fullyand the window will go all the way down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull thefront of the switch up.

Sun VisorsTo use the sun visor(s), pull the edge of the visornearest to the windshield toward you.

Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle may have a driver’s side vanitymirror. Swing down the sun visor and slide thecover to expose the mirror.

71

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

The security light,located on theinstrument panel cluster,will turn on to indicatethat arming hasbeen initiated.

Once the system is armed, the security light willflash once every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door is open.

Arming the SystemWhile the ignition is off, press the remote keylessentry transmitter lock button, to arm the system.

The system will arm after either of thesethings occur:

• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.

• Sixty seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on the transmitter asecond time while all the doors are closed,the system will arm immediately. The system armsin 60 seconds if a door is open, or after theopen door is closed.

If you do not want to arm the system, lock the carwith the manual door lock knobs.

72

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one ofthe following:

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter.

• Turn the ignition on.

If the system is armed and the trunk is openedusing the trunk release button on the transmitter,the system will temporarily disarm itself and re-armwhen the trunk has been closed. This allows you toexit the vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter,or open the trunk using the transmitter withouthaving to disarm and re-arm the system.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedIf the system is armed, it can be activated by:

• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This causesa ten second pre-alarm chirping noise followedby the horn sounding and lights flashing for30 seconds.

• Opening a passenger’s door. This immediatelycauses a full alarm of the horn sounding andlights flashing for 30 seconds.

After the 30 second alarm ends, the system willre-arm itself.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. The system will thenre-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter. This will also disarm thesystem.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.This will also disarm the system.

73

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when you press theunlock, lock, or trunk release buttons on theremote keyless transmitter, it means thatthe content theft security system alarm wasactivated previously.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is apassive theft-deterrent system. This means you donot have to do anything special to arm or disarmthe system. It works when you insert or remove thekey from the ignition.

74

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it preventsthe vehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on, the key may have adamaged transponder. Turn the ignition off andtry again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be not damaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 326. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 368.

It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto “learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If your vehicle was first sold in Canada, or if allthe currently programmed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealer or a locksmithwho can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keysmade and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK, and remove the key.

75

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it tothe RUN position within five seconds of theoriginal key being turned to the LOCK position.

5. The security light will turn off once the key hasbeen programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly andmust be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle isnot protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system atthis time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating YourVehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelinesfor the first 500 miles (805 km):• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow.• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain

from using the full throttle while driving.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

If these break-in procedures are not followed,the vehicle’s engine, axle, or other partscould be damaged.Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

76

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turn itto four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

9 (LOCK): This position locks your steeringcolumn. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove your key when the ignition isturned to LOCK.

If you have an automatic transmission, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless theshift lever is in PARK (P).

If you have a manual transmission, the ignitionswitch can be turned to LOCK in any shiftlever position.

{CAUTION:

If you have a manual transmissionremoving the key from the ignition switchwill lock the steering column and result ina loss of ability to steer the vehicle. Thiscould cause a collision. If you need toturn the engine off while the vehicle ismoving, turn the key to ACC.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operatessome of your electrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition.

77

R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns toafter you start your engine and release theswitch. The switch stays in RUN when the engineis running. But even when the ignition is notrunning, you can use RUN to operate yourelectrical accessories and to display some warningand indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to RUN fornormal driving.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor while in LOCK or ACC, when the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove the keyfrom the ignition and take it with you. This will lockthe ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

78

Shift Lock ReleaseFor vehicles with an automatic transmission, thefollowing procedure allows the ignition to be turnedto LOCK, and for the removal of the ignition key, incase of a dead battery or low voltage battery.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).

2. Using a tool, pry off the cover to the lockrelease access hole, located at the bottomof the steering column.

3. Place your finger into the access hole andlocate the plunger.

4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’sdoor while turning the ignition key to LOCK.

5. Remove the key.

Have your vehicle serviced at your dealer as soonas possible.

79

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which will allow the radioand power windows to continue to work upto 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.

Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignitionkey is in RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned off,the radio and power windows will continue towork for up to 10 minutes or until any dooris opened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Automatic TransmissionMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in the neutral positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold theclutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gently toallow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

80

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to ACC or LOCK.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

81

Automatic Transmission OperationIf your vehicle has an automatic transmission,the shift lever is located on the center consolebetween the front seats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you startthe engine because your vehicle cannotmove easily.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes firstand then press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is inRUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 89.

82

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

At low vehicle speeds, you can also useREVERSE (R) to rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice, or sand without damagingyour transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224 foradditional information.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.You can also use NEUTRAL (N) when yourvehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

83

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides better fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the

accelerator pedal about halfway down.• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push

the accelerator all the way down.The transmission will shift down to a lower gearand have more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 208.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transmission.Have your vehicle serviced right away. Youcan drive in LOW (L) when you are driving lessthan 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

FOURTH (4): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You might choose FOURTH (4) instead ofDRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roadsand when going down a steep hill.

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces the vehicle’sspeed without using your brakes, for slightdowngrades where the vehicle would otherwiseaccelerate due to steepness of grade. If constantupshifting or downshifting occurs while drivingon steep hills, this position can be used to preventrepetitive types of shifts. You might chooseINTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) whendriving on hilly and winding roads.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than INTERMEDIATE (I) without using yourbrakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inLOW (L), the transmission will not shift intolow gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. If you are stuck, do not spin thetires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.

84

Manual Transmission Operation

This is the shift patternfor a manualtransmission.

Here is how to operate your manual transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch pedal. Press the clutch pedal backdown. Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) thesame way you do for SECOND (2).

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

85

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutchpedal. After the vehicle stops, shift intoREVERSE (R). Slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal. If it is hardto shift, let the shift lever return to NEUTRAL andrelease the clutch pedal. Then press the clutchpedal again and shift into REVERSE (R). Donot attempt to shift into the fifth gear position priorto shifting into REVERSE (R). Your transmissionhas a lock out feature which prevents a fifthgear to reverse gear shift.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Also, use FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R), along withthe parking brake, for parking your vehicle.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 134.

86

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

If you forget to release your parking brake, a chimewill sound and a warning message will bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph(8 kph). See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 148.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingthe button on the shift lever and pushing thelever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

87

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. If the vehiclehas an automatic transmission, see if you can movethe shift lever away from PARK (P) without firstpushing the shift lock release button. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was not fully locked intoPARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too much forceon the parking pawl in the transmission. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 87.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

88

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system.

To shift out of PARK (P):

1. Apply the regular brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift lever button.

2. While holding down the brake pedal, pressthe shift lever button again.

3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever fromPARK (P), consult your dealer.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transmission)Before leaving your manual transmission vehicle,fully press the clutch pedal in, move the shiftlever in either FIRST (1) gear or REVERSE (R),and firmly apply the parking brake. See ManualTransmission Operation on page 85.

89

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

90

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

91

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 91.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 220.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transmission shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmissionshift lever to PARK (P), or the manualtransmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 87 and ParkingYour Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on page 89.

92

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhen you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side.The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust themirror to avoid glare from the lamps behindyou. Move the lever to the right for nighttime useand to the left for daytime use.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

If the vehicle has this mirror, while sitting in acomfortable driving position, adjust the mirror soyou can see clearly behind the vehicle. Gripthe mirror in the center and move it up and downor side to side. The day/night control, locatedat the bottom of the mirror, allows adjustment tolessen glare from the lamps behind you. Move thelever right for nighttime use; move the lever leftfor daytime use.

There are three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. For more informationabout OnStar® and the services it provides,see OnStar® System on page 94.

Outside Manual MirrorAdjust the outside rearview mirror so you can seea little of the side of your vehicle, and the areabeside your vehicle from a comfortable drivingposition. Some mirrors can be folded in to enternarrow passageways.

93

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door.

Move the selector switch located next to thefour-way control pad to the left or right to chooseeither the driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror.To adjust a mirror, use the arrows located on thefour-way control pad to move the mirror in thedesired direction. Adjust each outside mirror so thata little of the vehicle and the area behind it can beseen while sitting in a comfortable driving position.

Both mirrors can be manually folded by pullingthem toward the vehicle. This feature maybe useful when going through a car wash or aconfined space. Push the mirrors away from thevehicle to the normal position before driving.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

94

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

95

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

96

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 185 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services, yourvehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar® CallCenter at the time of an OnStar® button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and, in the event of acrash, additional information regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. thedirection from which your vehicle was hit).

When you use the Virtual Advisor feature ofOnStar® Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle alsosends OnStar® your GPS location so that we canprovide you with location-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle isin a place where OnStar® has an agreement with awireless service provider for service in that area.OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are ina place where the wireless service providerOnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,network capacity and reception when the service isneeded, and technology that is compatible with theOnStar® service. Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

97

Your vehicle must have a working electrical system(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar®

equipment to operate. There are other problemsOnStar® cannot control that may prevent OnStar®

from providing OnStar® service to you at anyparticular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Usethe key to lock and unlock.

Cupholder(s)

There are two cupholders located in the centerconsole, press and release to extend forward.

98

Your vehicle has a cupholder on the passengerside of the center console. To access it, press andrelease the forward section of the cupholder.

Center Console Storage AreaThere is also an upright center console storagearea between the seatbacks. To open the storagearea, press and release the button near the topso it extends out. Then, turn the button ineither direction to unlatch the lid and pull theconsole lid down. Press the release button back inafter you close the lid.

Convertible TopFor care and cleaning of the convertible top, seeConvertible Top on page 320 under “Serviceand Appearance Care”. High pressure car washesmay cause water to enter the vehicle.

The following procedures explain the properoperation of the manual convertible top.

99

The parts of the manual convertible top that areused when lowering and raising it are:

A. Front EdgeB. Side Edge

C. Rear ButtressesD. Trunk

Notice: Leaving the convertible top down andexposing the interior of your vehicle tooutdoor conditions may cause damage. Alwaysclose the convertible top if leaving yourvehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the convertible top whenthere are objects in the storage area coulddamage it or break the glass rear window.Always verify that no objects are in the storagearea before lowering the convertible top.

Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, ordirty can cause stains, mildew, and damageto the inside of your vehicle. Dry off thetop before lowering it.

Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle incold weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you maydamage top components. Do not lower the topin cold weather.

Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible topwhile the vehicle is in motion, you coulddamage the top or the top mechanism. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Always put an automatic transmission inPARK (P) or a manual transmission in FIRST (1)or REVERSE (R), turn the ignition off andengage the parking brake before raising orlowering the convertible top.

100

{CAUTION:

Moving parts of the convertible top can bedangerous. People can be injured by theconvertible top and its mechanism. Keeppeople away from your vehicle when youare lowering or raising the top.

Lowering the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface and set the parking

brake. Shift an automatic transmission intoPARK (P). Shift a manual transmissioninto FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

2. Make sure the ignition is turned off.

3. Push the trunk release button located in theglove box, or on the remote keyless entry,if equipped.

4. Lift the trunk.

5. The convertible top front latch, located abovethe inside rearview mirror, must be unlatched.Pull the latch down and turn itcounterclockwise to unlatch it.Leave the latch open and turned toprevent damage.

101

6. Pull rearward on the side edge (B) of theconvertible top and pull it off of the windshieldframe.

7. Push the convertible top down into thetrunk (D).

8. After the top is stored, apply one even push,as shown, on the convertible top to ensurethat the top is fully retracted and securelystored.

9. Close the trunk (D) by pressing down on itwith a swift, firm motion.

Do not operate rear defogger when convertible topis down.

A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed atthe factory on the trunk lid surface under theconvertible top buttresses. This film is designed tohelp prevent paint damage to the trunk lid. Do notremove this protective film. It is intended to remainpermanently affixed to the trunk lid surface.

Raising the Manual Convertible Top1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake

firmly and shift an automatic transmission intoPARK (P). Shift a manual transmission intoFIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

2. Make sure the ignition is turned off, and lowerthe windows.

3. Push the trunk release button located in theglove box, or on the remote keyless entry, ifequipped.

4. Lift the trunk.

102

5. Pull the convertible top forward by firmlygripping the side edge (B) and applying abrisk upward and forward motion to get the topin the full-up position.

6. Pull the front edge (A) of the convertible topforward from the outside of the vehicle, orpush the front edge (A) of the convertible topforward from the inside of the vehicle.

7. Turn the top front latch handle clockwise tolatch the convertible top.

8. Close the trunk (D) by pushing it down with aswift, firm motion.

9. At the rear edge of the convertible top, pressdown on the two buttresses (C) to latch theminto the top of the trunk.

A clear Mylar® protective film has been installed atthe factory on the trunk lid surface under theconvertible top buttresses. This film is designed tohelp prevent paint damage to the trunk lid. Do notremove this protective film. It is intended to remainpermanently affixed to the trunk lid surface.

103

✍ NOTES

104

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 108Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 110Other Warning Devices ............................. 110Horn .......................................................... 110Tilt Wheel .................................................. 111Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 111Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 112Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 112Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 113Windshield Wipers ..................................... 113Windshield Washer .................................... 114Cruise Control ........................................... 115Headlamps ................................................ 118Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 119Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 119Fog Lamps ................................................ 120Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 120Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 120Mirror Reading Lamps ............................... 120Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 121Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 121Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 122

Climate Controls ......................................... 122Climate Control System ............................. 122Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 126

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 127Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 128Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 129Tachometer ............................................... 129Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 130Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 130Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 131Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 132Charging System Light .............................. 134Brake System Warning Light ..................... 134Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 135Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/

Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light(2.0L Engine Only) .................................. 136

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ........................................ 137

Low Coolant Warning Light ....................... 138Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 138

Section 3 Instrument Panel

105

Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 142Security Light ............................................ 143Reduced Engine Power Light

(2.4L Engine Only) ................................. 143Highbeam On Light ................................... 143Trunk Ajar Light ........................................ 144Service Vehicle Soon Light

(2.4L Engine Only) ................................. 144Fuel Gage ................................................. 144Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 145

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 145DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 146DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 148DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 152

Audio System(s) ......................................... 157Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 158Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 159Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 161Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 166Using an MP3 ........................................... 176XM Radio Messages ................................. 183Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 185Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 185Radio Reception ........................................ 186Care of Your CDs ..................................... 187Care of the CD Player .............................. 187Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 187XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 187

Section 3 Instrument Panel

106

✍ NOTES

107

Instrument Panel Overview

108

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Window Outlets. See Climate ControlSystem on page 122.

B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 126.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 111.D. Cruise Control Buttons (If Equipped). See

Cruise Control on page 115.E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 128.F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 185.

G. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 120.

H. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 132.

I. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 110.

J. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped). See FogLamps on page 120.

K. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Button (If Equipped).See Electronic Stability Control on page 200 orTraction Control System (TCS) on page 198.

L. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls (IfEquipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 145.

M. Horn. See Horn on page 110.N. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls. See

Windshield Wipers on page 113 and WindshieldWasher on page 114.

O. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 122.

P. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). AccessoryPower Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) andCigarette Lighter on page 122 and AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 121.

Q. Shift Lever. See Manual TransmissionOperation on page 85. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 82(if equipped with automatic transmission).

R. Parking Brake Lever. See Parking Brake onpage 86.

S. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 157.

T. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 98.U. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 68.V. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 98.

109

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the center pad on thesteering wheel.

110

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise the steeringwheel to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then movethe wheel to a comfortable position, pull upthe lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 112.

• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 112.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 113.

• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps onpage 118.

111

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers will not see your turnsignal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to helpavoid an accident.

If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal aturn, check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 326.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to highbeam, push the turn signal lever away from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster will also be on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward you.

112

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn offthe windshield wipers.

& (Intermittent; Speed SensitiveWipers): Move the lever to this position forintermittent or speed sensitive operation. Whenyou select this position, the delay will varydepending on the vehicles speed, as well as themanually selected delay.

x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittentposition, turn the intermittent adjust band withthis symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter orlonger delay between wipes. To the left of theadjust band are bars, increasing in size frombottom to top, that indicate the frequency of thewipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement isless frequent. Larger bars mean the movementis more frequent.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to thefirst setting past intermittent, for steady wiping atlow speed.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to thesecond setting past intermittent, for wiping athigh speed.

113

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tothis position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it thereuntil the windshield wipers start; then let go.The windshield wipers will stop after one wipingcycle. If you want additional wiping cycles, hold thelever down longer.

Damaged wiper blades may prevent you fromseeing well enough to drive safely. To avoiddamage, be sure to clear ice and snow from thewiper blades before using them.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become damaged, get new blades or bladeinserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload. If the motor gets stuck, turn the wipersoff, clear away the snow or ice, and then turnthe wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are onfor more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlampswill turn on automatically. They will turn off15 seconds after the wipers are turned off.

Windshield WasherTo wash the windshield, press the button at theend of the lever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you release the button, the washerswill stop, but the wipers will continue to wipeabout three times or will resume theprevious speed.

114

Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has cruise control, it can maintaina speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or morewithout keeping your foot on the accelerator.This can really help on long trips. Cruise controldoes not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe left side of thesteering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off.

115

RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume aset speed and to accelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed andto decrease the speed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.The indicator light on the button will come on.

2. Get to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET− control button and release it.The CRUISE ENGAGED message will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) toshow the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When you apply the brakes or depress the clutch,the cruise control will shut off.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. Thisdisengages the cruise control. To return to yourpreviously set speed, you do not need to gothrough the set process again. Once you are goingabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can pressthe RES+ button briefly.

This will take you back up to your previouslychosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to increase speed.

1. Disengage the cruise control by applying thebrake pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerateto a higher speed and reset the cruise control.

2. If the cruise control system is alreadyengaged, press the RES+ button. Press it untilyou get up to the speed you want, and thenrelease the button. To increase your speed invery small amounts, press the RES+ buttonbriefly and then release it. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) faster.

116

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the SET− part of the buttonuntil you reach the lower speed desired,then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET− part of the button briefly. Each time thisis done, your vehicle will go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end cruise control, step lightly on the brakepedal or the clutch pedal if your vehicle hasa manual transmission.

Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch pedal willonly end the current cruise control session. Pressthe cruise control on/off button to turn thesystem completely off.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memory iserased.

117

Headlamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp switch has the followingfour positions:

2 (Headlamps): This position turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on theparking lamps and taillamps only.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Thisposition automatically turns on the DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) during daytime, and theheadlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps at night.

P (Off/On): This position is an Off/On switch forthe Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, thisapplies to vehicles with an automatic transmissionset to PARK (P) and manual transmission vehicleswith the parking brake engaged.

When operating in AUTO, a brief turn of theswitch to off/on will turn off the AutomaticHeadlamp System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFFmessage will display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), if the vehicle has one, and a chimewill sound. Turning the switch to off/on againwill turn the Automatic Headlamp System back on.An AUTO LIGHTS ON message will display onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

The Automatic Headlamp System is always turnedon at the beginning of an ignition cycle for vehicleswith manual transmission. When the parking brakeis engaged, the automatic headlamps will turn off.For vehicles with an automatic transmission, whenthe shift lever is shifted out of PARK (P), theAutomatic Headlamp System will turn on. Shiftingthe lever back to PARK (P) will turn off theautomatic headlamp system for vehicles with anautomatic transmission.

118

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignition offand the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel that helps control the DRL. Makesure it is not covered or the headlamps willcome on when they are not needed.

The DRL system makes both low beam headlampsturn on at reduced intensity when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).

While the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrument panel lights willnot be on.

The DRL system turns off on U.S. vehicles byusing the on/off switch for one ignition cycle, if thevehicle is in the PARK (P) position, or if thevehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km h) afterthe vehicle is started.

For vehicles first sold in Canada the DRL systemwill turn off when a automatic transmissionvehicle is in the PARK (P) position or the parkbrake is set on a manual transmission vehicle andthe vehicle speed is less than 8 mph (13 km h).

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when it is needed.

119

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle has a foglamp button, it is locatedon the instrumentpanel, to the right of thesteering wheel.

The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on.An indicator light on the fog lamp button will comeon when the fog lamps are on. Push the buttonagain to turn the fog lamps off.

The parking lamps will automatically turn on andoff when the fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D Instrument Panel Brightness: The controlfor this feature is located on the instrumentpanel to the right of the steering wheel.

Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights orcounterclockwise to dim them.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside your vehicle will go on when youopen any door. These lamps will fade out afterabout 20 seconds after all of the doors have beenclosed or when the ignition is turned on. Theselamps will also go on when you press thetrunk release, unlock symbol button or the hornsymbol on the keyless entry system transmitter.

The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about20 seconds after your key is removed from theignition to provide an illuminated exit.

Mirror Reading LampsYour vehicle has reading lamps on the rearviewmirror. Push the button to turn the readinglamps on and off.

120

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery saver feature designedto protect your vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignitionis turned off, the battery rundown protectionsystem will automatically turn the lamp off after20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlet can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlet is located on theinstrument panel, below the radio.

To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealerfor additional information on the accessorypower outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included withthe equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

121

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarettelighter. To use the lighter, located on theinstrument panel below the radio, push it in all theway and let go. When it is ready, it will popback out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

With this system you can control the heating andventilation of your vehicle. You may also beable to control the cooling of your vehicle, if yourvehicle has air conditioning. The in-betweenmode will be a combination of the two modes thatthe control is selected between.

Climate Control System with Air Conditioningshown, Climate Control System without Air

Conditioning similar

122

Temperature: Turn the left knob on the controlpanel to adjust the temperature of the air inthe vehicle. Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe temperature.

# (Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has airconditioning press the left knob on the controlpanel to turn the air conditioning system on or off.An indicator light on the button will come on tolet you know the air conditioning is activated.When the system is on, this setting coolsand dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle.

The air conditioning will not function if the fan isturned off. If air conditioning is selected withfan off, the LED light will flash three times andthen turn off.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorturns off and turns on again. This is normal. Thesystem is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintaining theselected temperature.

Air conditioning does not operate at temperaturebelow 40°F (4°C). In temperatures above 40°F(4°C), the air conditioning cannot be turned off indefrost, floor/defog, and recirculation modesbecause it helps to remove moisture from thevehicle. It also helps to keep the windows clear.

On hot days, open the windows to let the hotinside air escape; then close them. This helpsreduce the time it takes for your vehicle tocool down. It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select recirculation mode.

3. Select the air conditioning to on.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

123

9 (Fan): Turn the center knob on the controlpanel to control the fan speed. Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

9 (Off): Turn the center knob to this position toturn the fan off.

? (Recirculation): Press the center knob onthe control panel to recirculate air inside thevehicle and prevent outside air from coming in.It can be used to prevent outside odors fromentering your vehicle and cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly. Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. An indicator lighton the button will come on to let you know therecirculation mode is activated.

Recirculation is available in the bi-level and ventmodes. If recirculation is selected in eitherfloor/heat, floor/defog, or defrost mode, the LEDlight will flash three times indicating it is notavailable in that mode.

The right knob on the control panel is used todirect the airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knobto select one of the following modes:

H (Vent): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct air to the instrumentpanel outlets, and the remaining air to thefloor outlets and the defroster and side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct most of the air to thefloor outlets. The remaining air is directed tothe side window and defroster outlets. If there islittle or no airflow on the passenger side, makesure that the carpet covering is tucked under thefloor outlets.

124

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from your windshield and sidewindows. Use the defog mode to clear the windowsof fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Usethe defrost mode to remove fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. For best results, clear allsnow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.Use a temperature setting that provides warm air.The warmer the air the quicker the windowswill clear.

To prevent fogging on the inside of the windows inmodes other than floor/defog and defrost, makesure the air conditioning compressor, if the vehiclehas one, is on and recirculation mode is off.

/ (Floor/Defog): Turn the right knob on thecontrol panel to this mode to direct the air to thewindshield, the side window outlets, and to the flooroutlets. When you select this mode, the systemruns the air conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is near freezing or below.

0 (Defrost): Turn the right knob on the controlpanel to this mode to direct most of the air tothe windshield, and the side window outlets. Whenyou select this mode, the system runs the airconditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window. Besure to clear as much snow from the rear windowas possible. An indicator light on the knob willcome on to let you know that the rear windowdefogger is activated. The rear window defoggerwill turn off about fifteen minutes after theknob is pressed. If turned on again, the defoggerwill run for about seven and one-half minutesbefore turning off. If the vehicle speed is greaterthan 50 mph (80 kph) and the rear defoggeris active, it will remain on as long as the speed isgreater than 50 mph (80 kph). The defoggercan also be turned off by pressing the knob againor by turning off the engine.

125

= (Rear Defogger): Press the right knob on thecontrol panel to turn the rear window defoggeron or off.

Do not operate rear defogger when convertible topis down.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center and onthe side of your instrument panel to directthe airflow.

Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you toadjust the direction and amount of airflow insidethe vehicle. Move the louvers up or down orturn clockwise or counterclockwise to change thedirection of the airflow.

Your vehicle has flow through ventilation thatallows outside air to be forced through yourventilation system when your vehicle is moving.Outside air will enter the vehicle when the airconditioning fan is running. Flow throughventilation can be stopped in vent and bi-levelmodes by pressing the recirculation button.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

126

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the nextfew pages, some warning lights come on brieflywhen you start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They are a big help.

127

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you willneed to drive safely and economically.

United States Cluster shown, Canada and Turbo model similar

128

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

The vehicle’s odometer works together with theDriver Information Center (DIC), if your vehicle hasone. A Trip A and Trip B odometer can be set.See “Trip Information” under DIC Operationand Displays on page 146.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Open the driver’s door and themileage will be displayed briefly.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometerinstalled, the new one will be set to the correctmileage total of the old odometer.

Tachometer

The tachometerdisplays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

129

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 50 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

130

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 42.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUNor START. If the light does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

131

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

The indicator next to the passenger airbag statusindicator lights is the passenger safety beltreminder light. See Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light on page 130 for more informationon that indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


132

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 50 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 131.

133

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, and whenthe engine is notrunning, as a check toshow you it is working.

Then it should go out when the engine is started.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.


134

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. The light will stay on if your parking brakedoes not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you havea brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Make sure the parkingbrake is fully released. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 231.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when your engine isstarted and may stay on for several seconds.That is normal.

135

If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop assoon as possible and turn the ignition off. Thenstart the engine again to reset the system. If thelight still stays on after driving at a speed of at least13 mph (20 km/h), or comes on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you still havebrakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If theregular brake system warning light is also on, youdo not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 134.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to RUN. This is normal.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light(2.0L Engine Only)

This light is located inthe center of theinstrument panel cluster.

For vehicles that have the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system or the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this warning light should come onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. This light, along with the appropriateDriver Information Center (DIC) messages,indicates when the ESC system and the TCS areworking or are disabled.

136

If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS andpotentially the ESC system have been disabled.Check your DIC messaging to determinewhich feature(s) is no longer functioning andwhether it is because of the driver turning off thefeature(s), or the system may not be workingproperly and your vehicle requires service. If theTCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be limited.If the ESC system is disabled, the system will notaid in maintaining vehicle directional control. Ineither case, adjust your driving accordingly.

If the light is on and flashing, the TCS or the ESCsystem is actively working. Check the DICmessaging for details to determine which systemis working. If the LOW TRACTION messageappears, the system is limiting wheel spin. If theESC ACTIVE message appears, the systemis aiding in maintaining vehicle directional control.

See Electronic Stability Control on page 200and Traction Control System (TCS) on page 198for more information.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 148 formore information on the messages associatedwith this light.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 260 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 260. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when startingyour vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.

137

Low Coolant Warning Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnyour ignition on.

If this light comes on and stays on, the coolantlevel in your vehicle is low. If the light is on alongwith an overheat warning, you may have aserious overheating problem.

Notice: Driving with the low coolant warninglight on could cause your vehicle to overheat.See “Engine Overheating” under EngineCoolant on page 257. Your vehicle could bedamaged and the damages might not becovered by your warranty.

See Engine Coolant on page 257 for informationon what to do. Your vehicle should be serviced assoon as possible.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

138

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 235.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

139

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 240.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

140

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 237. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

141

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a low engineoil pressure problem,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when you aredriving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil.

The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working, but the light will go outwhen you turn the ignition to START. If itdoes not come on with the ignition on,you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light mayblink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

142

Security Light

This light flashes whenthe vehicle securitysystem is activated.

Reduced Engine Power Light(2.4L Engine Only)

This light will come onbriefly when the ignitionis turned on.

If this light is on, a chime will sound and anoticeable reduction in the vehicle’sperformance may occur.

Let the vehicle idle for a few minutes, if thereduced engine power light is still on, but there isno reduction in performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle maybe driven at a reduced speed while the reducedengine power light is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced.

Anytime the reduced engine power light stays on,the vehicle should be taken to an authorizeddealer as soon as possible for service.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 112.

143

Trunk Ajar Light

This light will come onand a chime will soundif the trunk is ajar.

Service Vehicle Soon Light(2.4L Engine Only)

This light will come onbriefly when the ignitionis turned on.

This light will come on if you have problems thatmay require the vehicle to be taken in for service.

If the light comes on, take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

Fuel GageYour fuel gage tells youabout how much fuelyou have left.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off

before the gage reads full.• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than

the gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.

For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 332.

144

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly when you arestarting the engine.

This light also comes on when the fuel tank is lowon fuel. When you add fuel the light should gooff. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle may have a Driver Information Center(DIC). The DIC display gives you the status of manyof your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used todisplay driver personalization menu modes andwarning/status messages. All messages will appearin the DIC display, located at the bottom of thetachometer on the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons arelocated on the left sideof the steering wheel.

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button to reset somevehicle information mode displays, select apersonalization menu mode setting, oracknowledge a warning message.

Press and hold the information and reset buttonsat the same time for one second, then releasethe buttons to enter the personalization menu.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 152 formore information.

145

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is on. TheDIC has different modes which can be accessedby pressing the DIC buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following.

Information Modes

q (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the following vehicle information modes:

OdometerPress the information button until the odometer isdisplayed. This mode shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km).

To change the DIC display to English or metricunits, see “UNITS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152.

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the information button until TRIP A orTRIP B is displayed. These modes show thecurrent distance traveled since the last reset foreach trip odometer in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Both odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the reset button for afew seconds while the desired trip odometeris displayed.

FUEL RANGEPress the information button until FUEL RANGE isdisplayed. This mode shows the remainingdistance you can drive without refueling in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km). It is based onfuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOWwill display.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. The FUEL RANGE modecannot be reset.

146

ECON (Economy)Press the information button until ECON isdisplayed. This mode shows how many miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)your vehicle is getting based on current andpast driving conditions.

Press and hold the reset button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fuel economyis not reset, it will be continually updated each timeyou drive.

AV (Average) SPEEDPress the information button until AV SPEED isdisplayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s averagespeed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h).

Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

OIL LIFEPress the information button until OIL LIFE isdisplayed. The engine oil life system showsan estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It willshow 100% when the system is reset after anoil change. It will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule inthis manual. See Engine Oil on page 247 andPart A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 336.

Always reset the engine oil life system after an oilchange. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem” under Engine Oil Life System onpage 252.

COOLANTPress the information button until COOLANT isdisplayed. This mode shows the temperatureof the engine coolant in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

147

BOOST (Turbo Only)If your vehicle has this feature, press theinformation button until BOOST is displayed. Thismode shows a graphic that indicates the amountof boost the engine is receiving in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message will clear when the vehicle’s conditionis no longer present. To acknowledge a messageand clear it from the display, press and holdany of the DIC buttons. If the condition is stillpresent, the warning message will come back onthe next time the vehicle is turned off and backon. With most messages, a warning chime soundswhen the message displays. Your vehicle mayhave other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFFThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is disabled with the headlamp switch.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ONThis message displays if the automatic headlampsystem is enabled with the headlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays to inform the driver that thebrake fluid level is low while the ignition is on.The brake system warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 134 for more information.Have the brake system serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when the life of the engineoil has expired and it should be changed.

When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, youstill must reset the engine oil life systemseparately. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 252 and Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices on page 336 for more information.

148

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays if the fuel cap has not beenfully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make surethat it is on properly. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn the message off.

COMPETITIVE MODEIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays when the Competitive Driving mode isselected. The Traction Control System (TCS) willnot be operating while in the Competitive Drivingmode and the ESC/TCS light on the instrumentpanel cluster will be on solid. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Electronic Stability Control onpage 200 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation.

CRUISE ENGAGEDThis message displays when the cruise controlsystem is active. See Cruise Control on page 115for more information.

DOOR AJARThis message displays if one or more of thevehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When thismessage displays, make sure that the door(s)are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVEIf your vehicle has Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), this message displays and theESC/TCS light on the instrument panel clusterflashes when ESC is assisting you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle. You may feel or hear thesystem working and see this message displayedin the DIC.

149

Slippery road conditions may exist when thismessage is displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. This message may stay on for a fewseconds after ESC stops assisting you withdirectional control of the vehicle. This is normalwhen the system is operating. See ElectronicStability Control on page 200 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L EngineOnly) on page 136 for more information.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFFIf your vehicle has Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), this message displays and theESC/TCS light on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when ESC is turned off. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See Electronic StabilityControl on page 200 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only) onpage 136 for more information.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOWThis message displays if the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace thebattery in the transmitter. See “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 62.

LOW TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel cluster flasheswhen the system is actively limiting wheel spin.Slippery road conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.This message stays on for a few seconds after thesystem stops limiting wheel spin. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 198 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0LEngine Only) on page 136 for more information.

PARKING BRAKEThis message displays if the parking brake is leftengaged. See Parking Brake on page 86 formore information.

150

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately.

SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITYCONTROL)If your vehicle has Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), this message displays and a chimesounds if there has been a problem detected withESC. The ESC/TCS light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. This light stays on solid aslong as the detected problem remains present.When this message displays, the system is notworking. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeElectronic Stability Control on page 200 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L EngineOnly) on page 136 for more information.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If this messagestill stays on or turns back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theESC inspected by your dealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTIONIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays and a chimesounds when the system is not functioningproperly. The ESC/TCS light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. This light stays onsolid as long as the detected problem remainspresent. When this message displays, the systemis not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 198and Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight (2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation. Have the TCS serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.

TRACTION OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays and theESC/TCS light on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when the TCS is turned off. Adjustyour driving accordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 198 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)on page 136 for more information.

151

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk lid is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunklid is closed completely. See Trunk on page 68and Trunk Ajar Light on page 144.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to apreferred setting. All of the features listed may notbe available on your vehicle. Only the featuresavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory, but may havebeen changed from their default state sincethat time.

To change feature settings, use the followingprocedure:

Entering Personalization Menu1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is

stopped.To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press and hold the information and resetbuttons at the same time for one second, thenrelease to enter the personalization menu.If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph(3 km/h), only the UNITS menu will beaccessible.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modes.Press the reset button to scroll throughthe available settings for each mode.If you do not make a selection within tenseconds, the display will go back to theprevious information displayed.

Personalization Menu ModesOIL LIFE RESETWhen this feature is displayed, you can reset theengine oil life system. To reset the system,see Engine Oil Life System on page 252. See“OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 146 for more information.

152

UNITSThis feature allows you to select the units ofmeasurement in which the DIC will display thevehicle information. When UNITS appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ENGLISH (default in United States): Allinformation will be displayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): All information willbe displayed in metric units.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.LOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp every time the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.When LOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on thefirst press of the lock button on the RKEtransmitter. The horn will still chirp on the secondpress.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of thelock button on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 62 for more information.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.

UNLOCK HORNIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn tochirp on the first press of the unlock button on theRKE transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display,press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when theunlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the first press ofthe unlock button on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 62 for more information.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.

153

LIGHT FLASHIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorhazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time thelock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on theRKE transmitter are pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears onthe display, press and hold the reset button for atleast one second to scroll through the availablesettings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting willnot flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signallighting will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunkrelease buttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 62 for more information.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.

DELAY LOCKThis feature, which delays the actual locking of thevehicle, can be enabled or disabled. WhenDELAY LOCK appears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at least one secondto scroll through the available settings:

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door is closed. You cantemporarily override delayed locking by pressingthe lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter a second time.

OFF: The doors will lock immediately whenpressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

See Delayed Locking on page 66 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 62for more information.


154

AUTO UNLK (Unlock)This feature, which allows the vehicle toautomatically unlock certain doors, can be enabledor disabled. When AUTO UNLK appears on thedisplay, press and hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through the available settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors will automaticallyunlock.

DRIVER: The driver’s door willautomatically unlock.

NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.You will need to manually unlock the doors.

If you have a manual transmission vehicle, thedoor(s) will automatically unlock when the key isturned off.

If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, youcan select when the automatic unlocking will occur.See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic TransmissionOnly)” following.

See Automatic Door Unlock on page 67 for moreinformation.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and move on tothe next feature.

UNLK (Unlock) (AutomaticTransmission Only)This screen displays only if your vehicle has anautomatic transmission and DRIVER or ALL isselected for the AUTO UNLK feature. This featuredetermines when the automatic door unlocking willoccur. When UNLK appears on the display, pressand hold the reset button for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the keyis turned off.

SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

See Automatic Door Unlock on page 67 formore information.


155

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTSIf your vehicle has Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),this feature, which allows the vehicle’s exteriorperimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, canbe enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTSappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turnon when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.

ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting willturn on when the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 62 for more information.


LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC will display. When LANGUAGEappears on the display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second to scroll through theavailable settings:ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display allinformation in English.FRENCH: The DIC will display all informationin French.SPANISH: The DIC will display all informationin Spanish.GERMAN: The DIC will display all informationin German.Choose one of the available settings and pressthe information button to select it and exit outof the personalization menu mode.

Exiting Personalization MenuThe personalization menu will be exited when anyof the following conditions occur:• A ten second time period has elapsed.• The ignition is turned off.

• The end of the personalization menu list isreached.

156

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 190. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 190.

157

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 80 for more information.

Setting the Time (Without DateDisplay)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numberedone through six, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the time byfollowing these steps:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) orRUN. Press the power knob, located in thecenter of the radio, to turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers will begin flashing on the display.

158

3. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time.

4. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stopafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clockbutton when the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

159

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turnthe tune knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, to adjust theselected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENUbutton and then the clock button when the radiois on. The date with display times out after afew seconds and goes back to the normal radioand time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

160

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio goes to the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. The volume canstill be adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

161

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor treble, press the tune knob or theBASS/TREBLE pushbutton until the desired tonecontrol label displays. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the setting. The current bass or treblelevel displays. If a station’s frequency is weak, orhas static, decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to adjustBASS and TREBLE Settings.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Loc (Locked): This message is displayed whilethe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

162

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 187 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back intothe player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

163

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release this pushbutton toresume playing the track. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance playback quickly. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to CD tracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from theCD you are listening to in random order.The random icon displays.

2. Press this button again to turn off random play.The random icon disappears from the display.

RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackcan be repeated.

To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. An arrow symboldisplays. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

4 (Information): Press this button to switchthe display between the track number, elapsedtime of the track, and the time. When the ignition isoff, press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays while a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.

164

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer while reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 190 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s frontauxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playingaudio from the device over the car speakers.

165

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux” displays.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

166

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersappears on the display. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

Playing the RadioO (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhileSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as yourspeed changes while driving. That way, the volumelevel should sound about the same as youdrive. To activate SCV:1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.2. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM

(automatic volume) label on the radio display.4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed

Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

167

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station and staythere.To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes on to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) candisplay. Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label displays.While information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to yourfavorite stations using the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has thisfeature. See Defensive Driving on page 190.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

168

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1 through 6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, pressthe tune knob until the tone control labels display.Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under the desiredlabel. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressingeither the SEEK, FWD (forward) or REV (reverse)button until the desired levels are obtained. If astation’s frequency is weak, or has static, decreasethe treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

169

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance orfade, press the tune knob until the speaker controllabels display. Continue pressing to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. The highlighted setting can beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, orREV button until the desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

170

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theXM CAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not let you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 183 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

171

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.To insert one CD, do the following:1. Press and release the load button.2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,

label side up. The player pulls the CD in.To insert multiple CDs, do the following:1. Press and hold the load button for

two seconds. You will hear a beep and LoadAll Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 187 for more information.If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.


172



Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.If the CD is not removed after several seconds, theCD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the ejectbutton for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is held,or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the tracks onthe CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly. You will hear sound ata reduced volume. Release this pushbutton toresume playing the track. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release this buttonto resume playing the track. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

173

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to the tracks in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs ina six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a singleCD player, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-discCD player, press and hold the LOADbutton. A beep sounds and Load All Discsdisplays. Insert one or more discs partway intothe slot of the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Randomize All Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have theMP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. Formore information on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 176later in this section.

174

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer while reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 190 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s frontauxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playingaudio from the device over the vehicle’s speakers.

175

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues to play, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system begins toplay audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is not connected,“No Aux Input Device” displays.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album can displaywhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressedaudio format.

176

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, orplaylist names. Long file, folder, or playlistnames, or a combination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists can cause theplayer to be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display, and might not fully display.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disccan cause the disc not to function in theplayer.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

177

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions are not displayedon a CD-R that was recorded without foldersor playlists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) firstand then goes to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

178

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software, can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.

179

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 187 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.




Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beep willsound and Ejecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed,after several seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. For theSix-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

180

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within anMP3 file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R can be played in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order from theCD-R that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-R beginsplaying again.

181

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listento MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. The album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album and begins to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3playback.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

182

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

183

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM TheftLocked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messagedisplays after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

184

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCK or LOCKED will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio willnot operate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Radio controls arelocated on the right sideof the steering wheel.If your vehicle hasthis feature, some audiocontrols can beadjusted at this location.They include thefollowing:

x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous stored radio station andstay there. Press and hold the up or down arrowlonger than three-quarters of a second to advanceto the next or previous station with a strongsignal in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track. Pressand hold the up or down arrow longer thanthree-quarters of a second to continue advancingahead or reversing back, to other tracks withinthe disc.

185

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button tosilence the system. Press this button again to turnthe sound on. If your vehicle is equipped withOnStar®, press and hold this button for two secondsto activate voice on the OnStar system. See theOnStar® System on page 94 in this manual formore information.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations willboost the power levels during the day, and then

reduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

186

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to the fender. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand, then with a wrenchone quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemYour vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radioantenna that is located on the trunk of yourvehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and icebuild up for clear radio reception.

187

✍ NOTES

188

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle .... 190Defensive Driving ...................................... 190Drunken Driving ........................................ 191Control of a Vehicle .................................. 194Braking ...................................................... 194Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 195Braking in Emergencies ............................. 197Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 198Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 200Electronic Stability Control ......................... 200Steering .................................................... 203Off-Road Recovery .................................... 206Passing ..................................................... 206Loss of Control .......................................... 208Driving at Night ......................................... 209

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 211City Driving ............................................... 214Freeway Driving ........................................ 215Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 216Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 217Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 218Winter Driving ........................................... 220If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 224Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 225Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 226

Towing ........................................................ 231Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 231Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 231Towing a Trailer ........................................ 231

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

189

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 12.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

190

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends upon fourthings:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

191

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

192

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision.At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance ofthis driver having a collision is 12 times greater;at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 timesgreater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

193

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 198 andElectronic Stability Control on page 200.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 235.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 134.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

194

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, your ABS will check itself. You mayhear a momentary motor or clicking noisewhile this test is going on, and you may evennotice that your brake pedal moves or pulses alittle. This is normal.

195

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

196

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal. This will help you retainsteering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 195.

In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

197

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that the rear wheels arespinning too much or are beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system works therear brakes and reduces engine power byclosing the throttle and managing engine spark tolimit wheel spin.

This light will flashwhen your tractioncontrol system is limitingwheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when TCSbegins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 111.

When this light is onsolid and either theSERVICE TRACTIONor TRACTION OFFmessage is displayed,the system will notlimit wheel spin.

Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 148 for more information.

The Traction Control System is automaticallyenabled whenever you start your vehicle. To limitwheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,you should always leave the system enabled.You can turn TCS off if you ever need to.

198

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may alsobe necessary to turn off the system when drivingin extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224.

To turn the system offor on, press and releasethis button located onthe instrument panel.

The DIC will display the appropriate message asdescribed previously when you press the button.

Traction Control OperationTraction control limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels (engine speedmanagement) and by applying brakes to eachindividual wheel (brake-traction control) asnecessary.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle, and itwill activate and flash the ESC/TCS light anddisplay the LOW TRACTION message if it sensesthat any of the wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction while driving. For more informationon the LOW TRACTION message, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 145.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle tospin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS andBrake warning lights and the SERVICE ESCand/or SERVICE TRACTION messages aredisplayed, you could damage the differential.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Reduce engine power and do not spinthe wheel(s) excessively while these lights andthis message are displayed.

199

Notice: When traction control is turned off,or Competitive Driving Mode is active, it ispossible to lose traction. If you attempt to shiftwith the rear wheels spinning with a loss oftraction, it is possible to cause damage to thetransmission. Do not attempt to shift when therear wheels do not have traction. Damagecaused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered.See your warranty book for additionalinformation.

The traction control system may activate on dry orrough roads or under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When thishappens, you may notice a reduction inacceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage. Whenroad conditions allow you to use cruise controlagain, you may re-engage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 115.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 235 for more information.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour vehicle may have a limited-slip reardifferential which provides maximum power andperformance. It is designed to give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. Itworks like a standard axle most of the time, butwhen one of the rear wheels has no tractionand the other does, this feature will allowthe wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

During a sudden shift, such as shifting fromFIRST (1) to SECOND (2) gear at low enginespeeds or suddenly applying the clutch, you mayfeel or hear a clunking or rattling noise. This isnormal.

Electronic Stability ControlYour vehicle may be equipped with an ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system which combinesantilock brake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to ensure there are no problems. You mayhear or feel the system working.

200

This is normal and does not mean there isa problem with your vehicle. The systemshould initialize before the vehicle reaches20 mph (32 km/h).

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theESC/TCS light will be on solid, and the ESC OFFor SERVICE ESC message will be displayed.

For more information, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 145 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light (2.0L Engine Only)on page 136.

This light will flash onthe instrument panelcluster when theESC system is bothon and activated.

You may also feel or hear the system working;this is normal.

When the light is on solid and either theSERVICE ESC or ESC OFF message is displayed,the system will not assist the driver in maintainingdirectional control of the vehicle. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 148.

See Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light(2.0L Engine Only) on page 136 for moreinformation.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system isautomatically enabled whenever you startyour vehicle. To assist the driver with vehicledirectional control, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the systemon. But, you can turn ESC off if you ever need to.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the systembegins to assist the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flashand the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 115.

201

The ESC/TCS buttonis located on theinstrument panel.

The traction control system can be turned offor back on by pressing the ESC/TCS button.To disable both traction control and ESC, pressand hold the button briefly.

When the ESC system is turned off, theTRACTION OFF and ESC OFF messages willappear, and the ESC/TCS light will be on solidto warn the driver that both traction controland ESC are disabled.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may alsobe necessary to turn off the system when drivingin extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224.Also, see “Competitive Driving Mode” later inthis section.

ESC may also turn off automatically if it determinesthat a problem exists with the system. The ESCOFF and SERVICE ESC messages and theESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driverthat ESC is disabled and requires service. Ifthe problem does not clear after restarting thevehicle, you should see your dealer for service.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 148 formore information.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 235 for more information.

Competitive Driving ModeThe driver can select this optional handling modeby pressing the ESC/TCS button on the consoletwo times within a five second time period.COMPETITIVE MODE will be displayed in the DIC.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 148 formore information. Competitive Driving Mode allowsthe driver to have full control of the rear wheelswhile the ESC system helps maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle by selective brake application.

202

The ESC/TCS light will be on and the tractioncontrol system will not be operating. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. This electronic stability controlmode is recommended only for use during closedtrack events and competitive driving venues.

When you press the ESC button again, or restartthe vehicle, the ESC and TCS will be turnedback on.

Notice: When traction control is turned off,or Competitive Driving Mode is active, itis possible to lose traction. If you attempt toshift with the rear wheels spinning with a lossof traction, it is possible to cause damageto the transmission. Do not attempt to shiftwhen the rear wheels do not have traction.Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle isnot covered. See your warranty book foradditional information.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.

Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

203

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 198 and Electronic Stability Controlon page 200.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


204

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock yourwheels.

See Braking on page 194. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

205

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

206

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane.

If the way is clear to pass, you will have arunning start that more than makes up for thedistance you would lose by dropping back.And if something happens to cause youto cancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane changesignal before moving out of the right lane topass. When you are far enough ahead ofthe passed vehicle to see its front inyour vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the rightlane change signal and move back intothe right lane. Remember that your vehicle’spassenger side outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

207

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skidare best handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

208

Of course, traction is reduced when water,snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on theroad. For safety, you will want to slow down andadjust your driving to these conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.If you do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control. Pushthe brake pedal down steadily when you have tostop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling,you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

209

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

210

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have

much tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

211

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,try to slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

212

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwisebe very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 284.

213

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 215.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

214

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

215

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

216

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

217

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

218

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

219

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 284.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, a pieceof old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to helpprovide traction. Be sure you properly secure theseitems in your vehicle.

220

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

The Traction Control System (TCS) improvesyour ability to accelerate when driving on a slipperyroad. But you can turn the TCS off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off ifyour vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice,or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 224. Even though yourvehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),you will want to slow down and adjust your drivingto the road conditions. Under certain conditions,you may want to turn the TCS off, such aswhen driving through deep snow and loose gravel,to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 198and Electronic Stability Control on page 200.

221

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too.If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 195. This system improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Whether you have ABS ornot, you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without ABS, ifyou feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up onthe brakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road mightbe fine until you hit a spot that is coveredwith ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice

patches may appear in shaded areas wherethe sun cannot reach, such as around clumpsof trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you couldbe in a serious situation. You should probablystay with your vehicle unless you know forsure that you are near help and you can hikethrough the snow. Here are some things to doto summon help and keep yourself and yourpassengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

222

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannotsee it or smell it, so you might not know itis in your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especiallyany that is blocking your exhaust pipe.And check around again from time to timeto be sure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

223

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

224

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transmission orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shifting thetransmission back and forth, you can destroythe transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 302.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you shouldturn the traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 198 and ElectronicStability Control on page 200. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission betweenFIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),spinning the wheels as little as possible. Toprevent transmission wear, allow the wheels tostop spinning before shifting gears. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear.

225

By slowly spinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions, you will cause a rockingmotion that may free your vehicle. If that doesnot get your vehicle out after a few tries, itmay need to be towed out. If your vehicle doesneed to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicleon page 231.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tireand Loading Information label and theCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

226

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open,you will find the label attached below the doorlatch. This label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 284 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 292.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “Certification Label” later inthis section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

227

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.Your vehicle is neither designed nor intendedto tow a trailer.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight @150 lbs (68 kg) x 1 =

150 lbs (68 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1

228




300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 100 lbs (45 kg)




400 lbs (181 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

229

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attachedto the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tellsyou the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

230

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if thereis a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 368.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing yourvehicle may cause damage because of reducedground clearance. Always put your vehicleon a flatbed truck.

Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended tobe towed with any of its wheels on the ground.If your vehicle must be towed, see “Towing YourVehicle” earlier in this section.

Towing a TrailerYour vehicle is neither designed nor intended totow a trailer.

231

✍ NOTES

232

Service ........................................................ 235Accessories and Modifications ................... 235California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 236Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 236Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 237Fuel ............................................................. 237

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 237Gasoline Specifications .............................. 237California Fuel ........................................... 238Additives ................................................... 238Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 239Filling the Tank ......................................... 240Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 242

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 242Hood Release ........................................... 243Engine Compartment Overview .................. 244Engine Oil ................................................. 247Engine Oil Life System .............................. 252Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 254Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 256Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 256Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 256Engine Coolant .......................................... 257

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 260Engine Overheating ................................... 260Cooling System ......................................... 262Power Steering Fluid ................................. 268Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 269Brakes ...................................................... 270Battery ...................................................... 273Jump Starting ............................................ 274

Rear Axle .................................................... 279Bulb Replacement ....................................... 280

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 280Headlamps ................................................ 280Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Fog Lamps ............................................ 281Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ...... 281Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 282License Plate Lamp ................................... 282Replacement Bulbs ................................... 283

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 283Tires ............................................................ 284

Winter Tires .............................................. 285Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 286Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 289

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

233

Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 292Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 293When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 295Buying New Tires ...................................... 296Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 297Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 298Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 299Wheel Replacement .................................. 299Tire Chains ............................................... 302If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 302Tire Inflator Kit .......................................... 303

Appearance Care ........................................ 314Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 314Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 315Leather ...................................................... 316Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 317Care of Safety Belts .................................. 317Weatherstrips ............................................ 317Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 318Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 318Finish Care ............................................... 319

Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 320Convertible Top ......................................... 320Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 321Tires ......................................................... 322Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 322Finish Damage .......................................... 322Underbody Maintenance ............................ 323Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 323Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 324

Vehicle Identification .................................. 325Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 325Service Parts Identification Label ............... 325

Electrical System ........................................ 326Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 326Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 326Power Windows and Other

Power Options ....................................... 326Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 326Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 327Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 329

Capacities and Specifications .................... 332

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

234

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

235

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attemptany vehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to serviceyour vehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 380.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 54.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Part E: MaintenanceRecord on page 357.

236

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse premium unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. You may alsouse regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration maybe slightly reduced, and you may notice a slightaudible knocking noise, commonly referred toas spark knock.

If the octane is less than 87, you may notice aheavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higheras soon as possible. Otherwise, you mightdamage your engine. If you are using gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 238 for additional information.

237

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label. If thisfuel is not available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 138. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

238

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

239

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

240

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 318.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the CHECK GAS CAP message willbe displayed if the fuel cap is not properlyinstalled. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 148 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 138.

241

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

242

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Locate the interiorhood release lever.It is located belowthe instrument panelon the driver’s sideof the vehicle.

2. Pull down on therear edge of thelever to releasethe hood latch.

3. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up onthe rear edge of the hood, near the windshieldto open the hood.

Notice: Closing the hood with the doors openmay damage the hood and/or doors. Alwaysclose the doors before closing the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then, pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

243

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

244

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 269.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 262.

C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 270 and HydraulicClutch on page 256.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 247.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 254.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 247.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 268.

H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).See Jump Starting on page 274.

I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 273.J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 274.K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 329.

245

When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 engine, this is what you will see:

246

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 269.

B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 262.

C. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 270 and HydraulicClutch on page 256.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 247.

E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 254.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 247.

G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 268.

H. Remote Negative (−) Ground (Out of View).See Jump Starting on page 274.

I. Battery (Out of View). See Battery on page 273.J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 274.K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 329.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip downand check the level.

247

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, youwill need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 332.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

2.4L L4 Engine 2.0L L4 Engine

248

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseFor Vehicles With the 2.0L L4 Engine

Look for two things:• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M, suchas Mobil 1® or equivalent. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified as synthetic.

However, not all synthetic oils will meet thisGM standard. You should look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have thestarburst symbol onthe container. Thissymbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM4718M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

249

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory witha synthetic oil which meets all requirementsfor your vehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M may not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 withthe starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substituteoil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M shouldnot be used for an oil change.

For Vehicles With the 2.4L L4 Engine

Look for two things:• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.

250

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil (VehiclesWithout a Driver Information Center)If your vehicle does not have a Driver InformationCenter (DIC), change the engine oil and filterat the intervals specified in the maintenanceschedule. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 337.

If your vehicle has a DIC, it has the Engine OilLife System. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 252 for information on when to change theengine oil.

251

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil (VehiclesWith Driver Information Center)If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), it has the Engine Oil Life System, acomputer system that lets you know when tochange the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will beindicated can vary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON messagewill come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 148. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year.

However, the engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuineGM parts and reset the system. It is also importantto check your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

252

After changing the engine oil, the system must bereset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.

2. Press the information and reset buttonson the DIC at the same time to enter thepersonalization menu. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 152.

3. Press the information button to scroll throughthe available personalization menu modesuntil the DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.

4. Press and hold the reset button until the DICdisplay shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This willtell you the system has been reset.

5. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the resetprocedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

253

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

2.4L L4 Engine

2.0L L4 Engine

254

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter element at eachscheduled Maintenance II service interval andreplace the air cleaner/filter element at thefirst oil change after 50,000 miles (85 000 km).If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, open the clampsthat hold the cover on and lift off the cover.Be sure to reinstall the cover tightly.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

255

Automatic Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmissionfluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, takeyour vehicle to the dealership service departmentand have it repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervalslisted in the Maintenance Schedule. SeePart A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 336. Be sure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 353.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage yourvehicle, and the damages may not becovered by your warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluid listedin Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 353.

Manual Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the manualtransmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leakis the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to the dealership servicedepartment and have it repaired as soon aspossible. You may also have your fluid levelchecked by your dealer when you have youroil changed. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 353 for the properfluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid from the brake mastercylinder reservoir.

See Brakes on page 270 for more information.

256

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 260.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

257

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 353 for more information.

258

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe COLD FILL line.

Do not overfill the surge tank. Too much coolantcan result in an overflow condition when the fluidis hot.

259

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant surgetank, but only when the engine is cool. If thecoolant surge tank is empty, a special fillprocedure is necessary. See Engine Overheatingon page 260 for instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fullyinstalled on the coolant surge tank. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 244 for moreinformation on location.

Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolant temperature warninglight on your vehicle’s instrument panel. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 137 for more information.

260

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn engine coolant temperature warning canindicate a serious problem. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 137.

If you get an engine coolant temperature warning,but see or hear no steam, the problem may notbe too serious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

If you get the engine coolant temperature warningwith no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

261

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

2.4L L4 Engine

262

A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engine isnot running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

2.0L L4 Engine

263

The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,water pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do not touchthem. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanare running. If the engine is overheating, the fanshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: Your engine has a specific coolingsystem drain and fill procedure. Failureto follow this procedure could cause yourengine to overheat and be severely damaged.If your engine’s cooling system needs tobe drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.

If you have not found a problem yet, check tosee if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.

264

If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not atthe COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 257 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank,add coolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

265

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure capwhen the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowly counterclockwise abouttwo or two and one-half turns. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow anypressure still left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Then keep turningthe pressure capslowly, andremove it.

266

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the COLD FILL line. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see if the level isbelow the COLD FILL line. If the level isbelow the line, add additional coolant to bringthe level up to the line. Repeat this procedureuntil the level remains constant at theCOLD FILL line for at least five minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower than the COLD FILL line, add more ofthe proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the COLD FILL line.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.See your dealer, if necessary.

267

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 244 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be between the COLD and HOTmarks. If necessary, add only enough fluid tobring the level up to the COLD mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 353. Always use the proper fluid. Failureto use the proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

268

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 244for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

269

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 244 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking outof the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.If it is, you should have your brake and/or clutchsystem fixed, since a leak means that sooneror later your brakes and/or clutch will notwork well, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake/clutchfluid. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your brake linings are worn, thenyou will have too much fluid when you getnew brake linings. You should add or removefluid, as necessary, only when work is done on thebrake/clutch hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutchhydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 134.

270

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 353.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch system, the brakes/clutchmay not work well, or they may not evenwork at all. This could cause a crash.Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake/clutch system parts. For example,just a few drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem can damage brake/clutch systemparts so badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 318.

271

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Front disc brake pads have built-in wear indicatorsthat make a high-pitched warning sound whenthe brake pads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound may come and go or be heardall the time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

272

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example, whenyour brake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 244 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 274 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

273

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a

12-volt battery with a negative ground system.Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

274

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps thatare not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal.

The remote positive (+)terminal is locatedunder a red plasticcover on the enginecompartment fuse block.Open the cover toaccess the terminal.

275

The remote negative (−)ground bracket islocated in the rear of theengine compartment,on the passenger’s sideof the vehicle, and ismarked GND (−).

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 244 for more information on the locationof the positive (+) and negative (−) terminalson your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even whenthe engine is not running and can injureyou. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

276

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location on the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery.It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−) terminal onthe vehicle with the dead battery.

277

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the dead battery.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)ground bracket for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

278

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 353.

279

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 283.For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace the low/high-beam/Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) headlamp bulb, do the following:1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on

page 243 for more information.2. Locate the headlamp bulb socket.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it from the headlamp assembly.

4. Holding the base of the socket, pull the oldbulb from the socket.

5. Replace with a new bulb.6. Reverse Steps 3 through 4 to reinstall.

280

Front Turn Signal, Parking andFog Lamps

A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

B. Fog Lamp(If Equipped)

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on

page 243 for more information.2. Reach underneath the front bumper and

locate the bulb assembly.3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

pull out the bulb assembly.4. Disconnect the bulb socket from the wiring

harness.5. Install a new bulb.6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the bulb

assembly and headlamp assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68

for more information.

2. Remove the two screws, which hold thetaillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.

3. Remove the taillamp assembly.4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to

remove.5. Pull the bulb from the socket.6. Install a new bulb.7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp

assembly.

281

Back-Up Lamps

The back-up lampsare located in therear bumper.

To replace a bulb, do the following:

1. Reach behind, up and under the rear bumperand locate the bulb socket.

2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from thebulb assembly.

3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket.5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs

in the lamp assembly and turn it clockwise tosecure it.

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp assembly to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelamp assembly.

282

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamps 3047

Fog Lamp 898*

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 3757NAK

Front Sidemarker Lamp 194

Headlamps, High/Low-Beam/Daytime Running Lights H13

License Plate Lamp 168

Stoplamp, Taillamp andTurn Signal Lamp 3157K

* Uplevel Model

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See At Least Twice a Yearon page 347 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 355.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assemblydo the following:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

283

2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage thehook and push the wiper arm (A) out of theblade (C).

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the release leverclick into place.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle’s Owner Manual.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 226.


284


• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 292.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

Notice: If your vehicle has P245/45R18 sizetires, they are classified as low-profiletires. Low-profile tires are more susceptible todamage from road hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires. Tire and or wheelassembly damage can occur when coming intocontact with road hazards like, potholes orsharp edged objects or when sliding intoa curb. Your GM warranty does not cover thistype of damage. Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and when possible avoidcontact with curbs, potholes and otherroad hazards.

Winter TiresIf your vehicle has P245/45R18 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performance tires. Thesetires are designed for very responsive driving onwet or dry pavement. If you expect to drive on snowor ice covered roads often, you may want to getwinter tires for your vehicle. The low-profileperformance tires may not offer the traction youwould like or the same level of performance aswinter tires on snow or ice covered roads.

285

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. With wintertires, there may be decreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shorter tire tread life.After switching to winter tires, be alert for changesin vehicle handling and braking.

See your dealer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also,see Buying New Tires on page 296.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread typeon all four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,load range, and speed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The example below shows a typicalpassenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

286

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 298.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

287

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

288

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission/transaxle, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theplies are laid at alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 292.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 226.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.

289

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 226.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 292 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 226.

290

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 295.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 298.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 226.

291

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), belowthe driver’s door latch. This label shows yourvehicle’s original equipment tires and the correctinflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 226. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort, never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

292

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 295and Wheel Replacement on page 299 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 337.

293

When rotating Goodyear Eagle RSA P245/45R18non-directional tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

If your vehicle has Goodyear Eagle F1-GS1P245/45R18 size tires, they are directional tiresand must roll in a certain direction for thebest overall performance. The direction is shownby an arrow on the tire sidewall. Becausethese tires are directional, they should be rotatedas shown here. These tires should only bemoved from front to rear and rear to front on thesame side of the vehicle.

Non-Directional Tires

Directional Tires

294

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 226 for an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label andits location on your vehicle. Make certain that allwheel nuts are properly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities and Specificationson page 332.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

295

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new, were designed tomeet General Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC spec) system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. Thisway, your vehicle will continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the same performance and vehiclesafety, during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride and handling, tractioncontrol, and tire pressure monitoring performance.GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’ssidewall by the tire manufacturer. If the tires havean all-season tread design, the TPC spec numberwill be followed by a MS, for mud and snow. SeeTire Sidewall Labeling on page 286 for additionalinformation.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires) the vehicle maynot handle properly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on yourvehicle’s wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

296

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicle performs, includingits braking, ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronicstability control, the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 296 andAccessories and Modifications on page 235for additional information.

297

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

298

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

299

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire clearance to the bodyand chassis.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off.

300

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or thethreads of the wheel nuts. If you do, thewheel nuts might come loose and thewheel could fall off, causing a crash.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto become loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to a crash. Be sure to use thecorrect wheel nuts. If you have to replacethem, be sure to get new GM originalequipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

301

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle parts. Thearea damaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of your vehicleand you or others may be injured in acrash. Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions. To helpavoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,re-adjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour wheels. If you do find traction devicesthat will fit, install them on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatYour vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is nospare tire, no tire changing equipment, andno place to store a tire.

It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. See Tires on page 284. If air goes outof a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.But, if you should ever have a blow out, here area few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blow out,remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

302

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level placeand stopping. Then do this:

1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 110.

2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has anautomatic transmission, set the parkingbrake firmly and put the shift lever inPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 87.If your vehicle has a manual transmission,move the shift lever to REVERSE (R) andset the parking brake firmly. See ParkingYour Vehicle (Manual Transmission) onpage 89 for additional information.

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel orhas damaged sidewalls or large tears thatallow rapid air loss, call a tire repair facility. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 368.

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by anail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflatorkit may be used to repair the damaged tiretemporarily. The kit uses a liquid tire sealant toseal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.

After repairing a tire with the tire inflator kit,take your vehicle to an authorized GM dealer tohave the tire inspected and repaired as soonas possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repaironly. See Tire Inflator Kit on page 303.

Tire Inflator KitYour vehicle has a tire inflator kit. There is no jackor spare tire. The kit uses a liquid tire sealantand air at the same time to seal small puncturesin the tread area of the tire. Be sure to readand follow all of the tire inflator kit instructions.

303

The kit includes the following:

A. Air CompressorB. Tire Sealant CanisterC. Air Compressor

Accessory PlugD. On/Off Switch

E. Air Pressure GageF. Air Compressor

Inflator HoseG. Sealant Filling Hose

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by anail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflatorkit can be used to temporarily repair thedamaged tire.

After temporarily repairing the tire with the inflatorkit, it is recommended to take your vehicle to adealer within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of drivingto have the tire inspected and repaired. If thesealant is not removed from the tire within100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving, it is morelikely that the tire can get damaged and have tobe replaced.

304

Accessing the Tire Inflator KitTo access the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Make sure the convertible top is in the upposition before accessing the tire inflator kit.

2. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 68 formore information.

3. Locate the tire inflator kit on the driver’sside of the vehicle, near the back corner ofthe trunk.

4. Remove the tireinflator kit strapby squeezingthe two tabs ofthe quick releasebuckle.

5. Remove the inflator kit from its foamcontainer.

305

Tire SealantThe kit contains a liquid sealant that when injectedinto a flat tire, can temporarily repair nail holesor cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealantcannot repair tire damage caused while drivingon a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” ora tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.The tire sealant solution is to be used for a singletire and can only be used once.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on thesealant canister. The sealant might not beas effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,see your dealer for a replacement canister.

Using the Tire Inflator KitTo use the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrapthe sealant filling hose from the compressor.

2. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the unit. To do this, pull the top portionof the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,and then unsnap the plug. Do not insert theplug into an accessory outlet yet.

3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tireby turning it counterclockwise.If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated thetire, do not remove it.

4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tirevalve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is inthe O (off) position.

306

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121for more information.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).See Engine Exhaust on page 91.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engineon page 80 for more information. Thevehicle must be running while using theair compressor.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on) position.The inflator kit forces sealant and air into thetire. Sealant might leak from the puncturehole until the vehicle is driven and the holehas sealed.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and thesealant filling hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running,the connection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the sealantfilling hose and the tire valve stem.

307

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure, found on the Tire andLoading Information label located onthe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below thevehicle’s door latch, using the air pressuregage on the top of the unit.The pressure gage reading is slightly highwhile the compressor is on. Turn thecompressor off to get an accurate pressurereading.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannotbe reached after 15 minutes, the vehicleshould not be driven farther. Damage to thetire is severe and the sealant will not beeffective. Remove the air compressor plugfrom the accessory power outlet and unscrewthe inflating hose from the tire valve. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 368.

10. Move the inflator kit switch to the O (off)position once the correct tire pressure isobtained.

11. Turn off the engine.

12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plugfrom the accessory power outlet in thevehicle.

13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from thetire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,and replace the tire valve stem cap.Be careful when handling the tire inflatorcomponents as they could be hot after usage.

14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its originallocation.

15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug backin the air compressor. To do this, wrap theair compressor accessory plug, snap inthe plug, and then push in the bottom andthen the top of the wrapped air compressoraccessory plug.

308

16. If the flat tire wasable to inflate tothe recommendedinflation pressure,remove themaximum speedlabel from thesealant canister.

Place it in a highly visible location suchas the inside of the upper left corner of thewindshield or to the face of the radio/clock.The maximum speed label reminds youto drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph(90 km/h) until you have the damaged tireinspected and repaired.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store the tireinflator kit in the proper place.

17. Return the equipment to the proper storagelocation in the trunk of your vehicle. You mayneed to loosen the retention strap to wrapit around the inflator kit and foam container.To do this, pull apart the strap and loosenthe strap at the quick release buckle.Then snap the buckle together, pull thestrap tight, and secure the loose end of thestrap by mating the ends.

309

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.Stop at a safe location and check thetire pressure, refer to Steps 1 through 8 under“Using the Air Compressor without Sealant”next in this section. If the tire pressurehas fallen more then 10 psi (68 kPa), belowthe recommended inflation pressure, stopdriving the vehicle. The tire is too damaged forthe sealant to work. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 368.If the tire pressure has not dropped more than10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommendedinflation pressure, you can inflate the tire backup to the recommended inflation pressure.

19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a localdealer or in accordance with your localstate codes and practices.After using the sealant canister, replace it witha new canister from a dealer.

20. After temporarily repairing a tire with theemergency flat tire repair kit, take yourvehicle to a dealer to have the tire inspectedand repaired.

Using the Air Compressor withoutSealantTo use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,do the following:

1. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the air compressor.

2. Unlock the air compressor hose from thesealant canister by pulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from thesealant canister.

310

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto thetire valve stem and push the lever down tosecure in place.

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug intoan accessory power outlet in the vehicle. SeeAccessory Power Outlet(s) on page 121 formore information.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO).See Engine Exhaust on page 91.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engineon page 80 for more information. Thevehicle must be running while using theair compressor.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can makeit explode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)position.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and the aircompressor hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running,the connection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the aircompressor hose and the tire valve stem.

311

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure using the air pressure gageon the top of the unit.

10. Turn off the air compressor by moving theswitch to the O (off) position.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store the tireinflator kit in the proper place.

11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose andwrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.

12. Place the equipment in the original location inthe trunk of your vehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant CanisterTo remove the sealant canister, do the following:

1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose fromthe sealant canister by pulling the lever up.

2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hosefrom the sealant canister.

3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from thecompressor.

312

4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator fillinghose is aligned with the slot in thecompressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister from the compressorand replace with a new sealant canister.See your dealer for more information.

To install a new sealant canister, do the following:

1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot inthe air compressor.

2. Push the sealant canister down and turn itclockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose ontothe sealant canister inlet and push thelever down.

313

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they werenot intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

314

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

315

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area untilthe cleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used. Allow the leather todry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Neveruse steam to clean leather. Never use spot liftersor spot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leatherand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

316

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your interior andare not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase glosson your instrument panel. The increase ingloss may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see throughthe windshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 353.

317

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sureto rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residuecompletely. Approved cleaning products can beobtained from your dealer.

See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 324. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents should be flushed promptlyand not allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 318.

318

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 324.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made fora basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

319

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Convertible TopThe vehicle’s convertible top should be cleanedoften. However, high pressure car washesmay cause water to enter your vehicle.

When you hand wash the top, do it in partialshade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and asoft sponge. A chamois or cloth may leave lint onthe top, and a brush can chafe the threads inthe top fabric. Do not use detergents, harshcleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.

Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly toavoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain onthe fabric for a few minutes. When the top is reallydirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner. Thoroughlyrinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dryin direct sunlight.

To protect the convertible top:

• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the topis completely dry before you lower it.

• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’spainted finish; it could leave streaks.

• If you decide to go through an automatic carwash, ask the manager if the equipmentcould damage your top.

320

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damagethe surface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlyGM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped withaluminum or chrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damagethe surface of these wheels.

321

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

322

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealeror an underbody car washing system can dothis for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causesthis, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged bythis fallout condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

323

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

324

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

325

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 54.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Anelectrical overload will cause the lamps to remainoff. If this happens, have your headlamp wiringchecked right away.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixedor goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

326

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that hasthe same amperage. Just pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without — like theradio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if itis the correct amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can.

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle under the carpet.

Remove the fuse block cover to access thefuses. Use the fuse puller to remove fuses.

After re-installing the fuse block cover, be sure totuck the carpet under the heater floor outlets.

Fuses Usage

1 Fuse Puller

2 Empty

3 Empty

4 Empty

5 Empty

327

Fuses Usage

6 Amplifier

7 Cluster

8 Ignition Switch, PassKey III+

9 Stoplamp

10 Climate Control System,PassKey III+

11 Empty

12 Spare

13 Airbag

14 Spare

15 Wiper

16

Climate Control System,Automatic Occupant SensingModule, Clutch Switch,Crank Relay, InstrumentPanel Cluster

17 Empty

18 Empty

Fuses Usage

19 Electric Power Steering,Steering Wheel Controls

20 Spare

21 Spare

22 Empty

23 Radio

24 Sensing and Diagnostic Module

25 Engine Control Module,Transmission Control Module

26 Door Locks

27 Interior Lamps

28 Steering Wheel Control Backlighting

29 Power Windows

30 Climate Control System

31 Empty

32 Retained Accessory Power

328

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse block.

To remove fuses, use the fuse puller, or hold theend of the fuse between your thumb and indexfinger and pull straight out.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 244for more information on location.

Fuses Usage

1 Empty (LE5); Cooling Fan (LNF)

2 Rear Window Defogger

3 Empty

4 Body Control Module 3

5 Crank

6 Body Control Module 2

7 Body Control Module

8 Cooling Fan 2 (LE5); Empty (LNF)

329

Fuses Usage

9 Empty

10 Trunk

11 Trunk

12 Empty

13 Fuel Pump

14 Rear Defogger Relay

15 Air Conditioning Clutch Relay

16 Empty

17 Empty

18 Trunk Release Relay

19 Fuel Pump Relay

20 Empty

21 Mirrors

22 Air Conditioning

23 Empty

24 Cooling Fan 2 Relay (LE5);Empty (LNF)

25 Fuse Puller

26 Powertrain Relay

Fuses Usage

27 Empty

28Back-up Lamps Relay(Automatic Transmission);Empty (Manual Transmission)

29 Data Link Connector

30 Outlet

31Back-up Lamps(Automatic Transmission);Empty (Manual Transmission)

32 Empty (LE5); Vacuum Pump (LNF)

33 Emissions

34 Crank Relay

35 Empty

36 Empty

37 Power Seat

38 Empty (LE5); Vacuum PumpRelay (LNF)

39 Empty

40 Cooling Fan 1 (LE5); Empty (LNF)

41 Empty (LE5); Turbo, CamPhaser (LNF)

330

Fuses Usage

42 Engine Control Module

43 Engine Control Module,Transmission

44 Anti-lock Brake System

45 Injectors, Ignition Coils (LE5);Ignition Coils (LNF)

46Back-up Lamps(Manual Transmission);Empty (Automatic Transmission)

47 Empty

48 Daytime Running Lamps Relay

49 Daytime Running Lamps

50 Cooling Fan 1 Relay (LE5);Empty (LNF)

51 Run/Crank Relay

52 Windshield Wiper Low/High Relay

53 Fog Lamps

54 Fog Lamps Relay

55 Horn Relay

56 S Band, OnStar®, RemoteKeyless Entry System

Fuses Usage


58 Wiper Diode

59 Windshield Wiper

60 Horn


62 Instrument Panel Ignition

63 Driver’s Side High Beam

64 Canister Vent

65 Driver’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

66 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

67 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

68 Parking Lamps Relay

69 Parking Lamps

70 Windshield Wiper On/Off Relay

71 Low-Beam Headlamp Relay

72 High-Beam Headlamp Relay

331

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer toPart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 353 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for more information.Cooling System

2.0L Engine Automatic 8.9 qt 8.4 L2.0L Engine Manual 9.0 qt 8.6 L2.4L Engine Automatic 8.5 qt 8.0 L2.4L Engine Manual 8.7 qt 8.2 L

Engine Oil with Filter 5.0 qt 4.7 LFuel Tank 13.6 gal 51.5 LTransmission, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill) 7.4 qt 7.0 LTransmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill) 2.75 qt 2.6 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap2.0L L4 X Automatic Manual 0.035 inch (0.90 mm)2.4L L4 B Automatic Manual 0.040 inch (1.01 mm)

332

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 334Introduction ............................................... 334Maintenance Requirements ........................ 334Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 334How This Section is Organized ................. 334Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ..... 336Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 336Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 337Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 346At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 346At Least Once a Month ............................. 346At Least Twice a Year .............................. 347At Least Once a Year ............................... 348

Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .... 351Steering and Suspension Inspection .......... 351Exhaust System Inspection ........................ 351Fuel System Inspection ............................. 351Engine Cooling System Inspection ............. 352Throttle System Inspection ........................ 352Brake System Inspection ........................... 352Part D: Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .............................................. 353Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 355Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 356Part E: Maintenance Record ...................... 357

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

333

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary to keep yourvehicle in good working condition. Any damagecaused by failure to follow scheduled maintenancemay not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided intofive parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”explains what to have done and how often. Someof these services can be complex, so unlessyou are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should let yourGM dealer’s service department do these jobs.

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supportedservice people that will perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.

334

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 236.

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 380.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells youwhat should be checked and when. It alsoexplains what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains important inspections that your dealer’sservice department can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products necessary tohelp keep your vehicle properly maintained. Theseproducts, or their equivalents, should be usedwhether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place foryou to record and keep track of the maintenanceperformed on your vehicle. Keep yourmaintenance receipts. They may be needed toqualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

335

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance serviceswhich are to be performed at the mileage intervalsspecified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive shortdistances only a few times a week. Or youmay drive long distances all the time in very hot,dusty weather. You may use your vehicle inmaking deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services youshould have done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your serviceneeds, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service people will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedin Part D. Make sure whoever services yourvehicle uses these. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you oranyone else drives the vehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these onthe Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 226.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 237.

336

Scheduled MaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to100,000 miles (160 000 km) should be repeatedafter 100,000 miles (160 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle. The servicesshown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) shouldbe repeated at the same interval after150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life ofthis vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 346 and Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 351.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

* If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), it also has the GM Oil Life System, acomputer system that lets you know when tochange the oil and filter. This is based on enginerevolutions and engine temperature and noton mileage. Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change will be indicatedcan vary considerably. For the oil life systemto work properly, you must reset the system everytime the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON messageon the Driver Information Center (DIC) willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 148. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next two times you stop for fuel.See Engine Oil on page 247. It is possible that,if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system may not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year. However, yourengine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system must bereset. It is also important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

337

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 252 for informationon resetting the system.

+ A good time to check your brakes is duringtire rotation. See Brake System Inspectionon page 352.

5,000 Miles (8 000 km)❑ Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC):

The Engine Oil Life System will tell you whento change the engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 252. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote *)

❑ Vehicles without Driver Information Center:Change engine oil and filter (or every3 months, whichever occurs first). An EmissionControl Service.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 293 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)








338

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary,replace the filter. If vehicle is driven industy/dirty conditions, inspect filter at everyengine oil change. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 254 for more information.










339














340








❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 254 for moreinformation.


❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F(32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as found in taxi, police,

or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, change the fluid and filter at100,000 miles (160 000 km).

341














342













343














344




❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 254 for moreinformation.


❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission ControlService.

❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F(32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− Uses such as found in taxi, police,

or delivery service.

If you have not used your vehicle under severeservice conditions listed previously and, therefore,have not changed your automatic transmissionfluid, change both the fluid and filter.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill cooling system (or every

60 months since last service, whichever occursfirst). This service can be complex; youshould have your dealer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 257 for whatto use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and neck. Pressuretest the cooling system and pressure cap.An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. Visuallyinspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.An Emission Control Service.

345

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure the safety, dependabilityand emission control performance of yourvehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendantto perform these underhood checks at eachfuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 247 forfurther details.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 257 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 269 for further details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inspection and Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires for wearand make sure they are inflated to the correctpressures. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 292.

346

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Alsosee Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 320.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth.

During very cold, damp weather more frequentapplication may be required. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 353.

Manual Transmission CheckIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluidlevel. Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. Have the system inspectedand repaired if needed.

Automatic Transmission InspectionIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluidlevel. A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. Check for leaks. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to your dealer and have itrepaired as soon as possible.

Hydraulic Clutch System CheckCheck the fluid level in the brake system andclutch system reservoir. See Hydraulic Clutch onpage 256. A fluid loss in the brake or clutchhydraulic system could indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repaired at once.

347

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondarylatch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,hood and body door hinges, rear compartment,and any folding seat hardware. Part D tellsyou what to use. More frequent lubrication maybe required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment.

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 86.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try tostart the engine in each gear. The vehicleshould start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine.

348

The vehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedalis not pushed all the way down, contact yourGM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 86.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transmission, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transmission, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.It should only lock when turned to the right.Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

349

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

350

Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsListed in this part are inspections and serviceswhich should be performed at least twice ayear (for instance, each spring and fall). Youshould let your dealer’s service departmentdo these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services maybe found in a service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 380.

Steering and Suspension InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectthe power steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect thebody near the exhaust system. Look for broken,damaged, missing or out-of-position parts aswell as open seams, holes, loose connectionsor other conditions which could cause a heatbuild-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumesinto the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 91.

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damageor leaks.

351

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed.Clean the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap is recommended at leastonce a year.

Throttle System InspectionInspect the throttle system for interference orbinding, and for damaged or missing parts.Replace parts as needed. Replace anycomponents that have high effort or excessivewear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruisecontrol cables.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads forwear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect otherbrake parts, including calipers, parking brake,etc. You may need to have your brakes inspectedmore often if your driving habits or conditionsresult in frequent braking.

352

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(2.4L L4engine)

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meetsall the requirements for your vehicle.To determine the proper viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 247.


Engine Oil(2.0L L4engine)

The engine requires a special engineoil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.Oils meeting this standard maybe identified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) Certified forGasoline Engines starburst symbol.However, not all synthetic API oilswith the starburst symbol will meetthis GM standard. You shouldlook for and use only an oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.For the proper viscosity, seeEngine Oil on page 247.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 257.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Hydraulic ClutchSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

353


WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Rear Axle(Limited-SlipDifferential)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.With a complete drain and refilladd 4 ounces (118 ml) ofLimited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358,in Canada 992694) where required.See Rear Axle on page 279.


ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

354

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15287103 A3076C

Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G

Spark Plugs

2.4L Engine 12598004 41-103

2.0L Engine 12590701 41-102

Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)

Driver’s Side —16 inches (40 cm) 10344209 —

Passenger’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm) 10344210 —

355

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Belt routing for A/C option shown. Dotted linerepresents routing for non A/C option.

2.0L and 2.4L L4 Engines

356

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed theservice and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

357

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


358



359



360

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 362Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 362Online Owner Center ................................. 365Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 366Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 366GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 367Roadside Assistance Program ................... 368Courtesy Transportation ............................. 371Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 373Collision Damage Repair ........................... 375

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 379Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 379Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 379Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 379Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 380

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

361

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the PontiacCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

362

When contacting Pontiac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

363

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you can call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

364

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

365

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac bydialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE(762-3743)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

366

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

367

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Pontiac RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service is covered at no charge if youare unable to gain entry into your vehicle. Ifyour vehicle does not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership. Inthe U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

368

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tirein good condition is covered at no charge. Thecustomer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start is covered at nocharge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance can send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.

We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it’s best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of $500(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

369

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. Pontiac RoadsideAssistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438,Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.

Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

370

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

371

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses maybe available. Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

372

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if thevehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), toprovide anti-lock braking and to help the drivercontrol the vehicle in difficult driving situations.Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored onlyin a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

373

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the

vehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and data collection.

374

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not covered by yourGM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any relatedfailures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

375

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.• Try to relax and then check to make sure you

are all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

376

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 368 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

377

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

378

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

379

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

380

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

381

✍ NOTES

382

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 235Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 121Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 55Additives, Fuel ............................................ 238Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 326Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 254Air Conditioning ........................................... 122Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 132Readiness Light ....................................... 131

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 373

Airbag System ............................................... 42Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 55How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 48Passenger Sensing System ....................... 50Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 54What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 48What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 48When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 47Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 45

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 187Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 187Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 195Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 135Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 321Care of Safety Belts ................................ 317Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 323Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 318Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 314Convertible Top ........................................ 320Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 315Finish Care .............................................. 319Finish Damage ......................................... 322Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 317Leather .................................................... 316Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 322Tires ........................................................ 322Underbody Maintenance ........................... 323Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 324Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 318Weatherstrips ........................................... 317Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 320

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 122

383

Audio System(s) .......................................... 157Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 185Care of Your CD Player ........................... 187Care of Your CDs .................................... 187Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 187Radio with CD ................................ 161, 166Setting the Time .............................. 158, 159Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 185Understanding Radio Reception ............... 186XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 187

Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 67Automatic Door Unlock .................................. 67Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 256Operation ................................................... 82

BBattery ........................................................ 273

Run-Down Protection ............................... 121Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 216Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 195Emergencies ............................................ 197Parking ...................................................... 86System Inspection .................................... 352System Warning Light .............................. 134

Brakes ........................................................ 270Braking ....................................................... 194Braking in Emergencies ............................... 197Break-In, New Vehicle ................................... 76Bulb Replacement ....................................... 280

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 282Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Fog Lamps ........................................... 281Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 280Headlamps ............................................... 280License Plate Lamps ................................ 282Replacement Bulbs .................................. 283Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..... 281

Buying New Tires ........................................ 296

CCalifornia Fuel ............................................. 238California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 236Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 332Carbon Monoxide .................. 68, 91, 220, 231Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 317Your CD Player ........................................ 187Your CDs ................................................. 187

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 176

384

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 99Chains, Tire ................................................. 302Charging System Light ................................ 134Check

Engine Light ............................................ 138Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 242Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 323Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 33Infants and Young Children ........................ 30Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ....... 37Older Children ........................................... 27Securing a Child Restraint in the

Passenger Seat Position ......................... 38Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 122Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 321Convertible Top ........................................ 320Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 318Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 315Finish Care .............................................. 319Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 314Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 317Leather .................................................... 316Tires ........................................................ 322

Cleaning (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 323Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 318Weatherstrips ........................................... 317Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 320

Climate Control System ............................... 122Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 126

Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 256Collision Damage Repair ............................. 375Content Theft-Deterrent ................................. 72Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 194Convertible Top ............................................. 99Coolant

Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 137Low Warning Light ................................... 138Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 260

Cooling System ........................................... 262Cruise Control ............................................. 115Cupholder(s) ................................................. 98Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 371Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 366Customer Assistance Offices .................... 366Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 362GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 367

385

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 379Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 379Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 379Roadside Assistance Program .................. 368Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 380

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 119Defensive Driving ........................................ 190Delayed Locking ............................................ 66Disc, MP3 ................................................... 176Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 236Door

Automatic Door Lock ................................. 67Automatic Door Unlock .............................. 67Delayed Locking ........................................ 66Manual Door Locks .................................... 65Power Door Locks ..................................... 66

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 18

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 145DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 146DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 152DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 148

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 209City .......................................................... 214Defensive ................................................. 190Drunken ................................................... 191Freeway ................................................... 215Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 218In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 211Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 225Winter ...................................................... 220

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 326Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 327Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 326Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 326Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 326Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 329

Electronic Stability Control ............................ 200

386

Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ...... 136Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 254Battery ..................................................... 273Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 138Coolant .................................................... 257Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 137Cooling System Inspection ....................... 352Drive Belt Routing .................................... 356Engine Compartment Overview ................ 244Exhaust ..................................................... 91Oil ........................................................... 247Oil Life System ........................................ 252Overheating ............................................. 260Reduced Power Light ............................... 143Starting ...................................................... 80

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 120Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 373Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 26

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 254Finish Damage ............................................ 322Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 187

Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 110Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 113Flat Tire ...................................................... 302Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 256Manual Transmission ................................ 256Power Steering ........................................ 268Windshield Washer .................................. 269

Fog Lamps .................................................. 120Fuel ............................................................ 237

Additives .................................................. 238California Fuel .......................................... 238Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 242Filling Your Tank ...................................... 240Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 239Gage ....................................................... 144Gasoline Octane ...................................... 237Gasoline Specifications ............................ 237Low Warning Light ................................... 145System Inspection .................................... 351

FusesFloor Console Fuse Block ........................ 327Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 326Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 329

387

GGage

Fuel ......................................................... 144Speedometer ........................................... 129Tachometer .............................................. 129

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 237Specifications ........................................... 237

Glove Box ..................................................... 98GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 367

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 110Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 326Headlamps ......................................... 118, 280

Bulb Replacement .................................... 280Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 119Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 113Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Fog Lamps ........................................... 281Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 280High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 112On Reminder ........................................... 119

Heater ......................................................... 122

Highbeam On Light ..................................... 143Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 217Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 218Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 242Release ................................................... 243

Horn ............................................................ 110How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 18Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 256

IIgnition Positions ........................................... 77Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 30Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 292Inflator Kit, Tire ........................................... 303Inspection

Brake System .......................................... 352Engine Cooling System ............................ 352Exhaust System ....................................... 351Fuel System ............................................ 351Part C - Periodic Maintenance .................. 351Steering and Suspension ......................... 351Throttle System ........................................ 352

388

Instrument PanelOverview .................................................. 108

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 120Cluster ..................................................... 128

JJump Starting .............................................. 274

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 61Keys ............................................................. 60

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 286Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 121Fog .......................................................... 120Mirror Reading ......................................... 120

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 37

Latches, Seatback ......................................... 11

License Plate Lamps ................................... 282Lift Seat, Power ............................................ 12Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 131Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 135Brake System Warning ............................. 134Charging System ..................................... 134Electronic Stability Control ........................ 136Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 137Highbeam On .......................................... 143Low Coolant Warning ............................... 138Low Fuel Warning .................................... 145Malfunction Indicator ................................ 138Oil Pressure ............................................. 142Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 132Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 130Reduced Engine Power ............................ 143Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 130Security ................................................... 143Service Vehicle Soon ............................... 144Traction Control System ........................... 136Trunk Ajar ................................................ 144

LightingEntry/Exit ................................................. 120

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 200

389

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 226Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................. 67Automatic Door Unlock .............................. 67Delayed Locking ........................................ 66Manual Door .............................................. 65Power Door ............................................... 66

Loss of Control ........................................... 208Low Coolant Warning Light .......................... 138Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 145

MMaintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 346At Least Once a Month ............................ 346At Least Once a Year .............................. 348At Least Twice a Year .............................. 347Brake System Inspection .......................... 352Engine Cooling System Inspection ........... 352Exhaust System Inspection ...................... 351Fuel System Inspection ............................ 351How This Section is Organized ................ 334Introduction .............................................. 334Maintenance Requirements ...................... 334

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 355Part A - Scheduled Maintenance

Services ............................................... 336Part B - Owner Checks and Services ....... 346Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ........................................... 351Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................. 353Part E - Maintenance Record .................... 357Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 337Steering and Suspension Inspection ......... 351Throttle System Inspection ....................... 352Using ....................................................... 336Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 334

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 138Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 256Operation ................................................... 85

Manual Windows ........................................... 71Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 148Mirror Reading Lamps ................................. 120

390

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ............................. 93Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........ 93Outside Manual Mirror ............................... 93Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 94

MP3 ............................................................ 176MyGMLink.com ............................................ 365

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................... 76Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 355

OOdometer .................................................... 129Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 206Oil

Engine ..................................................... 247Pressure Light .......................................... 142

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 252Older Children, Restraints ............................. 27Online Owner Center ................................... 365OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual .......... 94Other Warning Devices ................................ 110

Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 126Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 121Outside

Manual Mirror ............................................ 93Power Mirrors ............................................ 94

Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 322Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................... 87Shifting Out of ........................................... 89

ParkingBrake ......................................................... 86Over Things That Burn .............................. 90

Parking Your Vehicle ..................................... 89Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ..... 336Part B - Owner Checks and Services ........... 346Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ............................................... 351Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ................................................ 353Part E - Maintenance Record ....................... 357Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 132

391

Passenger Position, Safety Belts ................... 26Passenger Sensing System ........................... 50Passing ....................................................... 206PASS-Key® III+ ............................................. 74PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 74Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 121Door Locks ................................................ 66Electrical System ..................................... 326Lift Seat ..................................................... 12Reduced Engine Light .............................. 143Retained Accessory (RAP) ......................... 80Steering Fluid .......................................... 268Windows .................................................... 71

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 26

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 17

RRadios ........................................................ 157

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 187Care of Your CDs .................................... 187Radio with CD ................................ 161, 166Setting the Time .............................. 158, 159Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 185Understanding Reception ......................... 186

Rear Axle .................................................... 279Limited-Slip .............................................. 200

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................ 93Rearview Mirrors ........................................... 93Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 9Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 231Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 143Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 61Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System, Operation ..................................... 62Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 283

392

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government ............................. 379General Motors ........................................ 379United States Government ....................... 379

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 56Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 57Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................. 80Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 368Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 225Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 356Running the Engine While Parked ................. 92

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 130Pretensioners ............................................. 26Reminder Light ........................................ 130

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 317Driver Position ........................................... 18

Safety Belts (cont.)How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 18Passenger Position .................................... 26Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 17Safety Belt Extender .................................. 26Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 25Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 12

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 337Seatback Latches .......................................... 11Seats

Manual ........................................................ 8Power Lift Seat .......................................... 12Reclining Seatbacks ..................................... 9Seatback Latches ...................................... 11

Securing a Child RestraintPassenger Seat Position ............................ 38

Security Light .............................................. 143Service ........................................................ 235

Accessories and Modifications .................. 235Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 237California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 236

393

Service (cont.)Doing Your Own Work ............................. 236Engine Soon Light ................................... 138Publications Ordering Information ............. 380Vehicle Soon Light ................................... 144

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 54Setting the Time ................................. 158, 159Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 322Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 87Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 89Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 112Specifications, Capacities ............................ 332Speedometer ............................................... 129Starting Your Engine ..................................... 80Steering ...................................................... 203Steering and Suspension Inspection ............ 351Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 185Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 111Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area .................... 99Cupholder(s) .............................................. 98Glove Box ................................................. 98

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 224Sun Visors .................................................... 71

TTachometer ................................................. 129Taillamps

Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 281Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 185Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................ 72

Content Theft-Deterrent .............................. 72PASS-Key® III+ .......................................... 74PASS-Key® III+ Operation .......................... 74

Throttle System Inspection .......................... 352Tilt Wheel .................................................... 111Tires ........................................................... 284

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 321

Buying New Tires ..................................... 296Chains ..................................................... 302Cleaning .................................................. 322Different Size ........................................... 297If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 302Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 292Inspection and Rotation ............................ 293Tire Inflator Kit ......................................... 303Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 286

394

Tires (cont.)Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 289Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 298Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 299Wheel Replacement ................................. 299When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 295Winter Tires ............................................. 285

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 231Towing a Trailer ....................................... 231Your Vehicle ............................................. 231

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 198Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 200

Traction Control System Warning Light ........ 136Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ....................................... 256Fluid, Manual ........................................... 256

Transmission Operation, Automatic ................ 82Transmission Operation, Manual .................... 85Trunk ............................................................ 68Trunk Ajar Light ........................................... 144Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 112Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 111

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 186Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 298

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 194Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 226Parking Your .............................................. 89Service Soon Light ................................... 144Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders ........................................ 373

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 325Service Parts Identification Label .............. 325

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 152

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 126Visors ........................................................... 71

395

WWarning Lights, Gages and

Indicators ................................................. 127Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 148Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 110Other Warning Devices ............................ 110Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 299Different Size ........................................... 297Replacement ............................................ 299

Windows ....................................................... 70Manual ...................................................... 71Power ........................................................ 71

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 114Washer Fluid ........................................... 269Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 283Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 320Wipers ..................................................... 113

Winter Driving ............................................. 220Winter Tires ................................................. 285

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 183XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 187

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 334

396

Documents

2007 Pontiac Solstice Owner Manual M - General MotorsHow to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they ﬁrst receive their new vehicle. If this